SECTION 1 - Dealer E Process

04 SIENNA_U (L/O 0408)

1

2004 SIENNA from Aug. ’04 Prod. (OM45422U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1


2


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Multi−information display or garagedoor opener box

6. Front personal lights

7. Power sliding door switches

8. Power back door switch

9. Conversation mirror

10. Electric moon roof switch

11. Auxiliary boxes

12. Glove box

13. Power window switches

14. Power door lock switches

15. Automatic transmission selector lever

16. Audio remote control switches

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Parking brake pedal

19. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview


3


1. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger and windshield wiperde−icer switch

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Car audio

6. Power outlet main switch

7. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrentsystem indicator light

8. Air conditioning controls

9. Seat heater switches or auxiliary box

10. Auxiliary box

11. Cup holder and coin holder

12. Power outlets

13. Personal light main switch

14. Ignition switch

15. “TRAC OFF” switch

16. Cruise control switch or dynamic lasercruise control switch

17. Dynamic laser cruise control distanceswitch


4


18. Tilt and telescopic steering lock releaselever

19. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

20. Power sliding door main switch (“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch)

21. Power back door main switch (“BACK DOOR OFF” switch)

22. Power rear view mirror control switches

23. Power quarter window switch (“REAR VENT” switch)

24. Headlight beam level control dial


5


1. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Low fuel level warning light

5. Fuel gauge

6. Dynamic laser cruise control masterwarning light

7. Dynamic laser cruise control display

8. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panellight control knob

9. Odometer and two trip meters

10. Tachometer

Instrument cluster overview


6


Brake system warning light∗1or

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

or Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

or Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system/traction controlsystem warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


7


Cruise control indicator light∗2 or dynamic lasercruise control indicator light∗3

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 167 in Section 1−5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 192 inSection 1−6.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 195 in Section 1−6.

Slip indicator light

Traction control system off indicator light(two−wheel drive models)

Turn signal indicator lights

Dynamic laser cruise control ready modeindicator light

Conventional cruise control mode indicator light

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent systemindicator light


8



9


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front doors 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding doors 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power sliding doors 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back door 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual quarter windows 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power quarter windows 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2


10


Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in theglove box.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the front doors and sliding doorscan be locked without a key, you shouldalways carry a spare master key in caseyou accidentally lock your keys inside thevehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

Keys (without engineimmobilizer system)

Keys (with engine immobilizersystem)


11


To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the front doors and sliding doorscan be locked without a key, you shouldalways carry a spare master key in caseyou accidentally lock your keys inside thevehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.


12


� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.


13


The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 48 in this Section.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

Engine immobilizer system


14


For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI−21BTYMADE IN U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Locking operation (type A)

Unlocking operation (type A)

Wireless remote control


15


Locking operation (type B)

Unlocking operation (type B)

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, or activate thepanic mode from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.On some models, the system also al-lows you to activate the theft deterrentsystem from the same distance.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THEDOORS

To lock and unlock all the doors, pushthe switches of the transmitter slowlyand securely.

To lock: Push the “ ” (lock) switch. Allthe side doors and back door are lockedsimultaneously. At this time one beep willbe heard, turn signal lights will flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, or if the key is in theignition switch, locking cannot be per-formed by the “ ” (lock) switch and abeep will sound continuously for 10 sec-onds. However, if the key is in the igni-tion, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doorsand back door securely or push the “ ”(unlock) switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “ ” (unlock) switchonce to unlock only the driver’s door.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “ ” (un-lock) switch is pushed, two beeps will beheard, turn signal lights will flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the “ ” (unlock) switch ispressed, the front personal lights and igni-tion switch light come on. The lights re-mains on for about 15 seconds unless anyof the side doors or back door are openedthen and closed. (For further information,see “Front personal lights” on page 156and/or “Ignition switch light” on page 158in Section 1−4.)


16


You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will automatical-ly lock again.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “ ” (lock) or “ ” (unlock) switchis kept pressed in, the locking or unlock-ing operation is not repeated. Release theswitch and then push again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

� Cancelling the flash of the turn signallights

� Cancelling the beep sound

Right side power sliding door (type A)

Right side power sliding door (type B)

Left side power sliding door

OPENING AND CLOSING THE SLIDINGDOOR (vehicles with the power slidingdoor)

Push the switch of the wireless remotecontrol transmitter about one second.The power sliding door opens andcloses completely.

Right side power sliding door—

To open: Push the “ ” switch.

To close: Push the “ ” switch again.


17


Left side power sliding door—

To open: Push the “ ” switch.

To close: Push the “ ” switch again.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switches under the following conditionsonly:

� The sliding door is unlocked.

� The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)

� The key is not in the ignition switch.

� The sliding door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

The sliding door stops at the half−openedposition when the window is opened morethan about 15 cm (6 in.).

The left side power sliding door does notoperate when the fuel filler door isopened.

Closing operation can be performed by thewireless remote control switches under thefollowing conditions only:

� The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


� The sliding door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The sliding door operation by the wirelessremote control can be changed or dis-abled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

Type A

Type B


18


OPENING AND CLOSING THE BACKDOOR (vehicles with the power backdoor)

Push the “ ” switch of the wirelessremote control transmitter about onesecond. The power back door opensand closes completely.

When closing or opening the back door,two beeps will be heard and the turn sig-nal lights will flash twice.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switch under the following conditionsonly:

� The back door is unlocked.

� The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


� The back door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

Closing operation can be performed by theswitch under the following conditions only:

� The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch on theinstrument panel is pushed out.)


� The back door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The back door operation by the wirelessremote control can be changed or dis-abled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

ACTIVATING PANIC MODE

Pushing and holding the “ ” (panic)switch blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lightsand turns on the front personal lights.

The “ ” (panic) switch is used to detervehicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.


19


The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

� Push any of the switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter.

� Lock or unlock either front doors orback door with the key.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

The panic mode does not work when theignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLTRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the wireless remote controltransmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “REPLACINGTRANSMITTER BATTERY”.

If you lose your wireless remote controltransmitter, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to avoid the possibilityof theft, or an accident. (See “If you loseyour wireless remote control transmitter”on page 429 in Section 4.)

MADE IN U.S.A.

This complies with Part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.


20


REPLACING TRANSMITTER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.


21


3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all thedoors simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

Front doors


22


When either front door is unlocked with akey, the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 156 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 158 in Section 1−4.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if youleave the key in the ignition switch.


23


Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors andback door are closed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorsand back door with the power doorlock switch.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.


24


You can set the following auto doorlocking and unlocking functions.

(a) Locking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the selector le-ver is moved out of the “P” position withthe ignition switch in the “ON” position.

This function is the default setting for newvehicles.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the selector le-ver is moved to the “P” position with theignition switch in the “ON” position.

(c) Locking linked with the vehiclespeed

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or high-er. However, if any door is unlocked dur-ing driving, this auto locking function willnot operate until the unlocked door isopened once.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening thedriver’s door

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the driver’sdoor is opened within 10 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned from “ON” tothe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Setting the functions

1. Close all the side doors and back door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position;

� To set function (a)Push and hold the front of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in the “P”position.

� To set function (b)Push and hold the rear of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in the “P”position.

� To set function (c)Push and hold the front of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in anyposition except “P”.

� To set function (d)Push and hold the rear of the driver’sside power door lock switch for 5 sec-onds with the selector lever in anyposition except “P”.

All the side doors and back door automati-cally lock and unlock when you releasethe power door lock switch. This indicatesthat the function is set. If all the doors donot lock and unlock, the time the switchwas held may have been too short or toolong. Perform the procedure over againstarting from step 1.

If you want to cancel a function, repeatthe procedure. Each time you perform theprocedure, the function is set or can-celled.

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions


25



Move the lock knob.

To lock: Move the knob forward. To unlock: Move the knob backward.

Closing the sliding door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the slid-ing door. Be careful not to lock your keysin the vehicle.

CLOSING THE FULLY−OPENED SLIDINGDOOR

To close the fully−opened sliding door, pullthe inside or outside handle and thenclose the door.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the passengers from beingthrown out from the vehicle during anaccident. It also helps prevent thedoors from being opened unintention-ally.

CAUTION

� When closing the sliding door, con-firm safety of the area around.Keep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the sliding door. Other-wise, the closing door may causean unexpected serious injury.

� When the vehicle is stopped on aslope, the door will slide fasterwhen opening or closing, so be es-pecially careful that the passengersdo not get hit or pinched by thedoor.

Sliding doors


26


� When stopping on a downwardslope, open the door fully whilepassengers are getting on or off.Do not pull the outside handle orinside handle while the door isopen as the door could suddenlyclose by itself causing injury.

NOTICE

Do not close the sliding door by ap-plying the brakes. Doing so couldcause the door to be damaged.

When the fuel filler door is opened, theleft side siding door will not open.Close the fuel filler door securely andthen operate the sliding door.

NOTICE

Avoid forcibly opening the left sidesliding door fully when the fuel fillerdoor is opened. Otherwise, the fuelfiller door may be damaged.

When the sliding door window isopened more than about 15 cm (6 in.),the sliding door will stop at half−opened position. Close the window andthen operate the sliding door.

CAUTION

Do not leave the sliding door at half−opened position. If the vehicle isstopped on a downward slope, it maymove and cause an unexpected injury.


27


SLIDING DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Open the sliding door fully and movethe lock lever to the “LOCK” positionas shown on the label. Then close thesliding door.

If the child−protector is locked, you cannotopen the sliding door from the inside. Werecommend using this feature wheneversmall children are in the vehicle.

On Off

This switch is used to turn on and offthe power sliding door system. In orderto operate the power sliding door, the“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch on the in-strument panel must be pushed out.(The orange line on the top of theswitch indicates that the power slidingdoor system is on.) To disable the pow-er sliding door feature, push in theswitch.

When the power sliding door system ison, you can open and close the slidingdoor with the power sliding door switcheson the overhead console or wireless re-mote control transmitter even if the slidingdoor child−protector is locked.

CAUTION

� Do not leave small children or petsunattended in your vehicle. Theycould operate the power slidingdoor and injure themselves or oth-ers. Turn off the power sliding doorsystem when the power sliding dooris not in use.

� When jacking up the vehicle, turnoff the power sliding door systemand close the sliding door com-pletely.

Power sliding doors——Power sliding door main switch(“SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch)


28


NOTICE

When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower sliding door system is off.


Move the lock knob.

To lock: Move the knob forward. To unlock: Move the knob backward.

Closing the sliding door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the slid-ing door. Be careful not to lock your keysin the vehicle.

CLOSING THE FULLY−OPENED SLIDINGDOOR

To close the fully−opened sliding door, pullthe inside or outside handle and thenclose the door.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the passengers from beingthrown out from the vehicle during anaccident. It also helps prevent thedoors from being opened unintention-ally.

—Manual operation


29


Sliding door closer: When the slidingdoor has not been fully closed, it is auto-matically closed completely even if thepower sliding door system is off.

CAUTION

� Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe sliding door automaticallycloses when it has not been fullyclosed.

� Never allow a child to operate thesliding door.

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe sliding door closer is operating.Otherwise, the sliding door closermay be damaged.

CAUTION

� When closing the sliding door, con-firm safety of the area around.Keep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the sliding door. Other-wise, the closing door may causean unexpected serious injury.

� When the vehicle is stopped on aslope, the door will slide fasterwhen opening or closing, so be es-pecially careful that the passengersdo not get hit or pinched by thedoor.

� When stopping on a downwardslope, open the door fully whilepassengers are getting on or off.Do not pull the outside handle orinside handle while the door isopen as the door could suddenlyclose by itself causing injury.

NOTICE

Do not close the sliding door by ap-plying the brakes. Doing so couldcause the door to be damaged.


30


When the fuel filler door is opened, theleft side sliding door will not open.Close the fuel filler door securely andthen operate the sliding door.

NOTICE

Avoid forcibly opening the left sidesliding door fully when the fuel fillerdoor is opened. Otherwise, the fuelfiller door may be damaged.

When the sliding door window isopened more than about 15 cm (6 in.),the sliding door will stop at half−opened position. Close the window andthen operate the sliding door.

CAUTION

Do not leave the sliding door at half−opened position because the door willunlock after 30 minutes. If the vehicleis stopped on a downward slope, itmay move and cause an unexpectedinjury.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the sliding doorat half−opened position.


31


SLIDING DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Open the sliding door fully and movethe lock lever to the “LOCK” positionas shown on the label. Then close thesliding door.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the sliding door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Make sure to turn off the power slid-ing door system after locking thechild−protectors.

The power sliding door can be operatedautomatically in the following ways:

� Operates with the power sliding doorswitches inside the vehicle

� Operates with the wireless remote con-trol transmitter

� Assists operation with the outside orinside handle by hand

The power sliding door system can becanceled by the “SLIDE DOOR OFF”switch.

When the power sliding door system ison, if you shift out of “P” with the ignitionkey in the “ON” position and the slidingdoor is not completely closed, a buzzerwill sound.

CAUTION

� Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe sliding door automatically opensor closes.

� Never allow a child to operate thesliding door.

—Automatic operation


32


NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe sliding door is operated automati-cally. Otherwise, the power slidingdoor system may be damaged.

You can cause a beep to sound when thepower sliding door is opened or closed.For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Front overhead console

Center pillar

OPERATING WITH THE POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

To open the door, push the switch. Toclose the door, push the switch onceagain. The door opens and closes com-pletely.

Switches on the front overhead con-sole:

“ ” switch—To operate the left side

door.

“ ” switch—To operate the right side

door.

Switches on the center pillar:

“PWR DOOR” switch—To operate eachside door.

Opening operation can be performed bythe switches under the following condi-tions:

� The sliding door is unlocked.

� The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

� The sliding door is between the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.


33


� When the ignition key is in the “ON”position, the transmission selector levermust be in “P”.

� The child−protector is unlocked.(switches on the center pillar only)

Closing operation can be performed bythe switches under the following condi-tions:

� The power sliding door system is on.(The “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

� The sliding door is between the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

Left and right side power sliding doormodels—The left side power sliding doordoes not operate when the fuel filler dooris opened.

The length of time required to push theswitches for operating the sliding door canbe changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

CAUTION

If you shift the automatic transmis-sion selector lever out of “P” andaccelerate before the power slidingdoor is closed completely, the slidingdoor may reverse to the open posi-tion. A child or others could fall outof the vehicle and be injured. Alwaysmake sure the power sliding door isclosed and latched before you startdriving.

OPERATING WITH THE WIRELESSREMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

To open or close the door, push the“ ” or “ ” switches on the wire-less remote control transmitter aboutone second. (Only when the power slid-ing door system is on.) For details, see“Wireless remote control” on page 14in this Section.

ASSISTS OPERATION WITH THEOUTSIDE OR INSIDE HANDLE BY HAND

When the power sliding door system is on(the “SLIDE DOOR OFF” switch is pushedout), if you pull the outside handle or slidethe inside handle, the sliding door willautomatically and completely open orclose.

When the power sliding door system isoff, the sliding door can be operatedmanually by the outside or inside handle.


34


JAM PROTECTION FUNCTION

If anything with sufficient resistance ob-structs the power sliding door while it isclosing or opening, the sliding door willautomatically reverse to the opposite di-rection. However, if the power sliding dooris between the half−opened and fully−opened positions while it is opening, thedoor will stop at that position.

If the jam protection function operatescontinuously at the closing operation morethan 2 times, the sliding door will bestopped at that position and the powersliding door system will be canceled.

Before operating the power sliding door,make sure there is nobody near the slid-ing door. Make sure the sliding door stopsat the fully−opened position, and then al-low the passengers to get in and out ofthe vehicle.

The resistance must be as strong as theforce of the moving door, or stronger. Asthe sliding door approaches the fully−closed or fully−opened position, its movingforce increases significantly.

The jam protection function may not workif something gets caught just before thesliding door is fully closed.

If the sliding door receives a strong im-pact, this function may operate even ifnothing is caught.

CAUTION

The power sliding door could injurepeople if they are caught in the doorpath. When using the power slidingdoor, observe the following:

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to make the jam protectionfunction work intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the sliding door is fullyclosed.

� Before you close the power slidingdoor, always make sure there is no-body around it. Also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing door, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone closes the power slidingdoor, make sure he or she operatesthe door safely.

NOTICE

Objects caught in the path of the slid-ing door may be damaged. Make surethere is nothing in the doorway be-fore closing the sliding door.


35


If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power sliding door system maynot work after you reconnect, replace orrecharge the battery. In any of thesecases, close the sliding doors completelyby hand to normalize the power slidingdoor system.

If the power sliding door system does notoperate properly after the above proce-dure, there may be a problem in the sys-tem. Contact your Toyota dealer.

To open the back door, push the backdoor opener and raise the door.

The back door can be opened when thevehicle is stopped.

The back door can be locked or unlockedin the following ways.

� Operate the power door lock switch.(See “Front doors” on page 21 in thisSection.)

� Operate the wireless remote control.(See “Wireless remote control” on page14 in this Section.)

� All the side doors and back door arelocked and unlocked simultaneouslywith the driver’s door. (See “Frontdoors” on page 21 in this Section.)

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a key,the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 156 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 158 in Section 1−4.)

If the back door opener does not operate,see “If you cannot operate back dooropener” on page 430 in Section 4.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. Be careful not to lockyour keys in the vehicle.

Back door


36


When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 389in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

On Off

This switch is used to turn on and offthe power back door system. In orderto operate the power back door, the“BACK DOOR OFF” switch on the in-strument panel must be pushed out.(The orange line on the top of theswitch indicates that the power backdoor system is on.) To disable the pow-er back door feature, push in theswitch.

Power back door——Power back door main switch(“BACK DOOR OFF” switch)


37


CAUTION

� Do not leave small children or petsunattended in your vehicle. Theycould operate the power back door,and anyone around the back doorcould be injured. Turn off the powerback door system when the powerback door is not in use.

� When jacking up the vehicle, turnoff the power back door system andclose the back door completely.

NOTICE

When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower back door system is off.

To open the back door, push the backdoor opener and raise the door.

The back door can be opened when thevehicle is stopped.

The back door can be locked or unlockedin the following ways.

� Operate the power door lock switch.(See “Front doors” on page 21 in thisSection.)

� Operate the wireless remote control.(See “Wireless remote control” on page14 in this Section.)

� All the side doors and back door arelocked and unlocked simultaneouslywith the driver’s door. (See “Frontdoors” on page 21 in this Section.)

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a key,the front personal lights and ignitionswitch light will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Front personal lights” onpage 156 and “Ignition switch light” onpage 158 in Section 1−4.)

If the back door opener does not operate,see “If you cannot operate back dooropener” on page 430 in Section 4.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. Be careful not to lockyour keys in the vehicle.

—Manual operation


38


When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.


CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

Back door closer: When the back doorhas not been fully closed, it is automati-cally closed completely even if the powerback door system is off.

CAUTION

� Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closeswhen it has not been fully closed.

� Never allow a child to operate theback door.

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door closer is operating.Otherwise, the back door closer maybe damaged.


39


The power back door can be operatedautomatically in the following ways:

� Operates with the power back doorswitch on the overhead console

� Operates with the wireless remote con-trol transmitter

� Assists closing by hand

The power back door system can be can-celed by the “BACK DOOR OFF” switch.

When closing or opening the back doorautomatically, two beeps will be heard andthe turn signal lights will flash twice.

The beep sound can be changed. For de-tails, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closes.

� Never allow a child to operate theback door.

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door is operated automati-cally. Otherwise, the power back doorsystem may be damaged.

OPERATING WITH THE POWER BACKDOOR SWITCH

To open the door, push the “ ”switch on the overhead console aboutone second. To close the door, pushthis switch once again. The door opensand closes completely.

—Automatic operation


40


Opening operation can be performed bythe switch under the following condi-tions:

� The back door is unlocked.

� The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

� The back door is between in the fully−closed position and half−opened posi-tion.

� When the ignition key is in the “ON”position, the transmission selector levermust be in “P”.

Closing operation can be performed bythe switch under the following condi-tions:

� The power back door system is on.(The “BACK DOOR OFF” switch ispushed out.)

� The back door is between in the fully−opened position and half−opened posi-tion.

The time of pushing the switches for oper-ating the back door can be changed. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING WITH THE WIRELESSREMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

To open or close the door, push the“ ” switch on the wireless remotecontrol transmitter about one second.(Only when the power back door sys-tem is on.) For details, see “Wirelessremote control” on page 14 in this Sec-tion.

ASSISTS CLOSING BY HAND

When the power back door system is on(the “BACK DOOR OFF” switch is pushedout), if you move the back door about10—15 cm (4—6 in.) from its fully−openedposition, the back door will automaticallyand completely close.

When the power back door system is off,the back door can be closed manually.

The assisting function when closing theback door can be disabled and the assist-ing function when opening the back doorcan be added. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

JAM PROTECTION FUNCTION

If anything with sufficient resistance ob-structs the power back door while it isclosing or opening, the back door will au-tomatically reverse to the opposite direc-tion.

If the jam protection function operatescontinuously at the closing operation morethan 2 times, the back door will bestopped at that position.


41


Before operating the power back door,make sure there is nobody near the backdoor.

The resistance must be as strong as theforce of the moving door, or stronger. Asthe back door approaches the fully−closedor fully−opened position, its moving forceincreases significantly.

The jam protection function may not workif something gets caught just before theback door is fully closed.

If the back door receives a strong impact,this function may operate even if nothingis caught.

CAUTION

The power back door could injurepeople if they are caught in the doorpath. When using the power backdoor, observe the following:

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to make the jam protectionfunction work intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the sliding door is fullyclosed.

� Before you close the power backdoor, always make sure there is no-body around it. If someone’s neck,head or hands get caught in a clos-ing door, it could result in a seri-ous injury. When anyone closes thepower back door, make sure he orshe operates the door safely.

NOTICE

Objects caught in the path of theback door may be damaged. Makesure there is nothing in the doorwaybefore closing the back door.


42


If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door will be automaticallylocked and the power back door systemmay not work after you reconnect, replaceor recharge the battery. In any of thesecases, normalize the power back doorsystem by following procedure.

1. Unlock the back door with the key,remote control transmitter or powerdoor lock switch.

2. Close the back door completely byhand.

If the power back door system does notoperate properly after the above proce-dure, there may be a problem in the sys-tem. Contact your Toyota dealer.

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each front door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, the front door windows and slidingdoor windows work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Itstops working when either front door isopened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Power windows


43


Type A (to open only)

Type B (to open and close)

Automatic operation:

Type A—Push the switch completely downand then release it. The window will fullyopen. To stop the window partway, lightlypull the switch up and then release it.

Type B—Push the switch completely downor pull it completely up, and then releaseit. The window will fully open or close. Tostop the window partway, lightly move theswitch in the opposite direction and thenrelease it.

Jam protection function (type B only):During automatic closing operation, thewindow stops and opens half way if some-thing gets caught between the window andwindow frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switchand lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the windowcloses and hold the switch for a sec-ond.

Make sure that the window opens andcloses automatically. If the power windowcannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.


44


CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

Window lockswitch


45


OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

The sliding door window cannot be oper-ated when the sliding door is opened.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the power win-dows, make sure he or she oper-ates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.


46


To open the quarter window, pull thelatch handle toward you and swing itfully out.

When closing the window, make sure it iscompletely closed.

The quarter windows can be operatedwith the “REAR VENT” switch on theinstrument panel.

The power quarter windows work when theignition switch is in the “ON” position.

To open: Push the switch on the upperside.To close: Push the switch on the lowerside.

Both the left and right rear quarter win-dows move as long as you hold theswitch.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Theystop working when either front door isopened.

CAUTION


� Before you close the power quarterwindows, always make sure there isnobody around the power quarterwindows. You must also make surethe heads, hands and other parts ofthe bodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the power win-dows, make sure he or she oper-ates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerquarter window switches withoutsupervision.

Manual quarter windows Power quarter windows


47


� Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the power quarter windowswitch and get trapped in a window.Unattended children can be involvedin serious accidents.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Hood


48


3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,move it straight up. If it is moved to theside or toward the inside of the vehicle,it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

To deter the vehicle theft, the systemis designed to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-tery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andturn signal lights, and turns on the frontpersonal lights.

Theft deterrent system


49


SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”on page 13 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system can be canceled by the fol-lowing ways:

� Any of the side doors or the back dooris unlocked with the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON” position.

If the parking lights and tail lights comeon for 2 seconds when the system iscanceled, the system has been alarmed.Check to see if there is any abnormalitywith your vehicle.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the side doors or back dooris unlocked or opened without the keyor wireless remote control transmitter,or if the hood is forcibly opened.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and anyof the side doors or back door is un-locked, all the side doors and back doorwill re−lock automatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.


50


Reactivating the system

Once set, the system is automatically re-set after the alarm stopped automaticallyafter one minute.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingthese ways:

� Unlock any of the side doors or theback door with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

These ways cancel the system at thesame time.

If the battery becomes discharged dueto the vehicle being unused for a longtime, etc., when the battery is rechargedor replaced, the system will give thealarm. If this happens, immediately unlockany of the side doors or the back doorwith the key or the wireless remote con-trol transmitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above. Allthe side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light starts flash-ing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

Fuel tank cap


51


1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

NOTICE

Avoid opening the fuel filler doorwhen the left side sliding door is fullyopened. Otherwise, the fuel filler doormay be damaged.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it an additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.


52


3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right, and set it in thereceptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear one click.When you hear the click, the cap isfully closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.


53


Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch on the overhead console.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

The roof will fully open automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will open while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, thedeflector will raise to reduce the enteringof the strong wind. The angle of the de-flector will be adjusted according to thevehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will close while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt up while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push the switchon either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt down whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Electric moon roof


54


Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

� If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during slide clos-ing operation, the moon roof stops andopens half way, and the deflector stopsand raises fully.

� If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during tiltingdown operation, the moon roof stopsand opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the moon roof may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push andhold the switch on the “TILT UP” side untilthe moon roof tilts all the way up andthen tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens andcloses automatically. If the moon roof can-not be operated properly, have it checkedby your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION


� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone closes the moon roof, firstmake sure it is safe to do so.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.


55


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSeats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and MirrorsSeats 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrests 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3


56


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow sitting on top of afolded−down seatback, or in theluggage compartment or cargo area.Persons not properly seated and/orproperly restrained by seat beltscan be severely injured in the eventof emergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow pas-sengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Severe inju-ries can occur in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


57


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seatsequipped with side airbags. Suchchanges may prevent the side air-bags from activating correctly, dis-able the system or cause the sideairbags to inflate accidentally, re-sulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

� Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving, as theseat may unexpectedly move andcause the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seatsexcept for putting them in the auxil-iary box. Otherwise, the objectsmay interfere with the seat−lockmechanism or unexpectedly pushup the seat position adjusting leverand the seat may suddenly move,causing the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

—Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS sideairbags) —Seat adjustment precautions


58


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING KNOB

To change the seat height, turn theknob either way.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting driver’s seat(manual seat)


59


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

4. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING KNOB

To change the amount of lumber sup-port, turn the knob either way.

1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHIONANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting driver’s seat(power seat)


60


CAUTION


3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING KNOB

To change the amount of lumber sup-port, turn the knob either way.



2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION


—Adjusting front passenger’sseat


61


3. SEATBACK FOLDING LEVER (onsome models)

The front passenger’s seat can befolded down using this lever.

1. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver and raise the seatback to its up-right position.

2. Pull the seatback folding lever andfold the seatback down.

—Folding front passenger’sseat


62


You can use the seatback as a temporarytable only when the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:

� Do not set up the seatback tablewhile the vehicle is moving.

� Do not sit on the folded seatback.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat is securely locked in slidingposition when you set the seat asa temporary table.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat, avoidputting heavy loads on the temporarytable.

CAUTION

� Adjustment should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position,try sliding it forward and backwardto make sure it is lock in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions


63


� When returning seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug-gage compartment. See “—Stowage pre-cautions” on page 389 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

Outer seat Center seat

—Adjusting second seats


64




2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER/STRAP (from front)

Lean forward and pull the lever or straptoward you. Then lean back to the de-sired angle and release the lever orstrap.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSTRAP (from rear)

Pull the strap and push the seatbackforward or pull it backward to the de-sired angle and release the strap.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the passengersare sitting up straight and well backin the seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hips andapply restraint forces directly to theabdomen or your neck may contactthe shoulder belt. In the event of afrontal collision, the more the seat isreclined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

For access to the third seat, performthe following procedure.

Fold down the seatback while pulling theseatback angle adjusting lever or strapand swing up the seat.

After passengers are in, return the seatuntil it locks securely, and lift up the seatback by pulling the lever or strap.

—Tumbling second seat forthird seat entry


65


CAUTION

After returning the seat, make surethe seat is securely locked by push-ing forward and rearward on the topof the seatback or by trying to pullup the edge of the bottom cushion.Failure to do so will prevent seat beltfrom operating properly.

When returning the tumbled secondseat to its original position:

Once the seat is moved from thetumbled position to the folded−downposition, it cannot be directly returnedto the tumbled position again. (It is im-possible to operate the seat in the or-der 1→2→1.) When you return thefolded−down seat (position 2) to itstumbled position (position 1), you mustreturn the folded−down seat (position 2)to its original position (position 3)once. (It is possible to operate the seatin the order 1→2→3→1.)


66


BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS(7−passenger models)

1. Stow the second seat belt bucklesas shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from stickingout when you tumble the second seats.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the buckles must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passesthrough the hanger when folding thesecond seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position. Hold the center of thelever and pull it up. Then slide theseat to the rear−most lock position.

—Tumbling second seats(outer seats)


67


2. 7−passenger models only: Pull thearmrests up.

3. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting lever orstrap and swing up the seat.

If the front seat is in the way, adjust itso it will not interfere.

CAUTION

� Make sure the seat is free of peopleor luggage. Then, hold the seat andslowly move it. Otherwise, peoplemay be injured or luggage may bedamaged if the seat hits them.

� To avoid serious injury, do not siton the folded seatback.

4. Take the holding strap out of thepocket. Pass the strap through theassist grip, and hook it as shown inthe illustration.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe pocket.

NOTICE

� Do not use anything other than theassist grip to hold the second seat.

� The holding strap must be stowedinto the pocket when it is not inuse.


68


CAUTION

� When tumbling the second seats,fix the seats securely by adjustingthe length of the holding strap.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

� Do not sit on the third seats whenthe second seat is tumbled in orderto prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop.


When you fold down the seatback from itsupright position, the rear leg locks willdisengage. In this case, lift up the seatand fold down again to engage the rearleg locks.

CAUTION




� Make sure the second seat is se-curely locked in position when youset the second seat as a temporarytable.

NOTICE



69




CAUTION

When folding or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent personal injury:

� Do not fold or remove the seatwhile the vehicle is moving.

� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or sudden stop:

� Make sure the seat is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback orby trying to pull up the edge of thebottom cushion. Failure to do sowill prevent the seat belt from oper-ating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.


70


TUMBLING SECOND SEAT


2. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting strap.

3. Pull the seat lock release lever (red)and swing up the seat.

If the front seats are in the way, adjustit so it will not interfere.

If the seat is not in the rear−most lockposition, the rear leg will not unlock. Inthis case, slide the seat to the rear−mostlock position and then do the above op-eration again.

—Tumbling second seat(center seat)


71


CAUTION



4. Take the holding strap out of thepocket. Pass the strap through theassist grip, and hook it as shown inthe illustration.

When returning the second seat to itsoriginal position, put the holding strap intothe pocket.

NOTICE

� Do not use anything other than theassist grip to hold the second seat.

� The holding strap must be stowedinto the pocket when it is not inuse.

CAUTION

� When tumbling the second seats,fix the seats securely by adjustingthe length of the holding strap.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

� Do not sit on the third seats whenthe second seat is tumbled in orderto prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop.


72



CAUTION




� Make sure the second seat is se-curely locked in position when youset the second seat as a temporarytable.

NOTICE


CAUTION

When folding or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent personal injury:







73


BEFORE REMOVING SECOND SEATS(7−passenger models)

1. Stow the second seat belt bucklesas shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from stickingout when you fold up the second seats.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat beltbuckles, the buckles must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

2. Make sure the shoulder belts passthrough the hangers when foldingthe second seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hanger when the seat belt is inuse.

REMOVING SECOND SEATS


—Removing second seats(outer seats)


74


2. 7−passenger models only: Pull thearmrests up.

3. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting lever orstrap and swing up the seat.

CAUTION



4. Pull and hold the front leg releasestrap and fold down the seat. Thenthe front leg locks will disengageand you can remove the seat.

CAUTION

When removing the seat, observe thefollowing to prevent personal injury:



� Be careful not to hit the removedseat against a person or drop it onyourself.


75


To prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop:

� Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback while driving.

� Do not leave the removed seatloose in the vehicle.

� Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed seat.

NOTICE

� Avoid putting heavy loads on theremoved seat. The metallic tips ofthe seat leg may be damaged andthe seat cannot be reinstalled.

� Do not carry the removed seat withholding the seat position adjustinglever. Otherwise, the seat may slideand not installed properly. If youslide the removed seat, return theseat to the rear−most position be-fore it is installed.

Front of the vehicle

7−passenger models



—Installing second seats(outer seats)


76


When you install the second seats, besure to place it where the seat is origi-nally positioned because each secondseat is not interchangeable. You candistinguish the original seat position bythe position of the front seat leg pinand the shape of the seat striker bezelin the floor.

The right side second seat has a pin inthe outside of the right front leg and theleft side second seat has a pin in theoutside of the left front leg as shown inthe illustration.

CAUTION

You must install the seat in properposition to wear the seat belt proper-ly. Failure to be properly restrainedwith the seat belt in an accident cancause death or serious injury. Referto the label on the side of the seatfor additional installation instructions.

NOTICE

You must install the seat in its origi-nal position. If it is installed in thewrong position, the seat lock or bezelwill be damaged.

1. Align the front leg hooks with therear strikers in the floor. Then swingup the seat.

2. Make sure the front leg is lockedsecurely, fold down the seat and en-gage the rear leg lock.


77


You can easily align the front leg hookswith the rear strikers by using the floorbezel. Put the front legs of the seat shortof the rear strikers as shown in the il-lustration. Then slide the seat forwardalong the groove of the bezel until thefront legs will reach the striker. Make surethe front legs align with the striker, swingup the seat.

NOTICE

When installing the seat, make sureto align the front leg hooks with bothof the rearmost strikers in the floor.If you align the legs with the frontstrikers, the bezel in the floor will bedamaged.

If you lock the rear legs before the frontlegs are locked securely, disengage therear leg lock by pushing the red pin insideeach rear leg. Then reinstall the seat fol-lowing the correct procedure.


78




CAUTION

When reinstalling the seat, observethe following to prevent personal inju-ry:

� Do not reinstall the seat while thevehicle is moving.



� After folding or installing the seat,push it forward and backward tomake sure it is locked in position.

When reinstalling seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or suddenstop:



79


� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

� Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent theoccupants from using seat beltsproperly.

� Do not reinstall the seat with itsback facing forward.

� Make sure the seat is securelylocked in the proper position.

NOTICE

Do not carry the removed seat byholding the seat position adjusting le-ver. Otherwise, the seat may slide andnot be installed properly. If you slidethe removed seat, return the seat tothe rear−most position before it isinstalled.

7−passenger models only: The rightside seat can be moved to the insidewhen the console box is not installedbetween the second seats.


80


REMOVING CENTER SECOND SEAT


2. Fold down the seatback while pullingthe seatback angle adjusting strap.

3. Pull the rear leg release lever (red)and swing up the seat.

If the seat is not in the rear−most lockposition, the rear leg will not unlock. Inthis case, slide the seat to the rear−mostlock position and then do the above op-eration again.

—Removing second seat(center seat)


81


CAUTION



4. Pull and hold the front leg releasestrap and fold down the seat. Thenthe front leg locks will disengageand you can remove the seat.

CAUTION

When removing the seat, observe thefollowing to prevent personal injury:




To prevent personal injury in a colli-sion or sudden stop:

� Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback while driving.

� Do not leave the removed seatloose in the vehicle.

� Do not try to sit on or place any-thing on the removed seat.


82


NOTICE

� Avoid putting heavy loads on theremoved seat. The metallic tips ofthe seat leg may be damaged andthe seat cannot be reinstalled.

� Do not carry the removed seat withholding the seat position adjustinglever.


When you install the second seats, besure to place it where the seat is origi-nally positioned because each secondseat is not interchangeable. You candistinguish the original seat position bythe position of the front seat leg pinand the shape of the seat striker bezelin the floor.

The second center seat has a pin in theinside of the right front leg as shown inthe illustration.

CAUTION

You must install the seat in properposition to wear the seat belt proper-ly. Failure to be properly restrainedwith the seat belt in an accident cancause death or serious injury. Referto the label on the side of the seatfor additional installation instructions.

NOTICE

You must install the seat in its origi-nal position. If it is installed in thewrong position, the seat lock or bezelwill be damaged.

—Installing seconds seat(center seat)


83


1. Align the front leg hooks with therear strikers in the floor. Then swingup the seat.

2. Make sure the front leg is lockedsecurely, fold down the seat and en-gage the rear leg lock.

You can easily align the front leg hookswith the rear strikers by using the floorbezel. Put the front legs of the seat shortof the rear strikers as shown in the il-lustration. Then slide the seat forwardalong the groove of the bezel until thefront legs will reach the striker. Make surethe front legs align with the striker, swingup the seat.


84


NOTICE

When installing the seat, make sureto align the front leg hooks with therearmost strikers of each pair in thefloor. If you align the legs with thefront strikers, the bezel in the floorwill be damaged.

If you lock the rear legs before the frontlegs are not lock securely, disengage therear leg lock by pulling the rear leg re-lease lever. Then reinstall the seat follow-ing the correct procedure.


85


INSTALLING THE SECOND CENTERSEAT IN THE FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

The second center seat can be used inthe forward position.

To use the center second seat in the for-ward position, install according to the fol-lowing procedure.

BEFORE INSTALLING THE SECONDCENTER SEAT IN FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

1. Slide the front seats forward fromthe rear−most position, stand theseatbacks to the upright position.

2. For vehicles equipped with the frontseat side table, pull up the lock re-lease lever and fold the table down.


86


INSTALLING THE SECOND CENTERSEAT IN THE FRONT AND CENTERPOSITION

1. Remove the second center seat fromthe normal position. (For details, see“—Removing second seat (centerseat)” on page 80 in this Section.)

Align the front leg hook with therear striker of the forward pair. Thenswing the seat until it reaches thefolded seat side table.

2. Push the foot pedal forward to se-curely latch the front leg locks. Makesure the front leg is locked securely,fold down the seat and engage therear leg lock.


87


CAUTION

When reinstalling the seat, observethe following to prevent personal inju-ry:

� Do not reinstall the seat while thevehicle is moving.



� After folding or installing the seat,push it forward and backward tomake sure it is locked in position.

When reinstalling seats to their origi-nal position, observe the followingprecautions in order to prevent per-sonal injury in a collision or suddenstop:


� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

� Install each seat in the same posi-tion from which it was removed.Failure to do so will prevent theoccupants from using seat beltsproperly.

� Do not reinstall the seat with itsback facing forward.

� Make sure the seat is securelylocked in the proper position.

NOTICE

Do not carry the removed seat byholding the seat position adjusting le-ver.

—Adjusting third seats


88


SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING STRAP

Lean forward and pull the strap for-ward. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the strap.

CAUTION

� Align both seatbacks at the sameangle when a person sits in thethird seat center position. Other-wise, the person cannot wear theseat belt properly and this maycause serious injuries in a collision.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or per-sonal injury.

BEFORE STOWING THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles asshown in the illustration.

This prevents the belt buckles from fallingout when you stow the third seat.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowedbefore you stow the third seat.

2. To stow the center seat belt, pull itslightly out of its cover. It will auto-matically roll back partway. Roll theseat belt backwards as shown aboveand insert it into the slot of its cov-er. Make sure the tabs are securelylocked in the cover.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

—Stowing third seats


89


STOWING THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjustingstrap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK”printed on its surface), then folddown the seatback.


90


3. Pull and hold the seat lock releasestrap (“TO STOW/USE” printed on itssurface) and lift up the seat rear-ward. Then push the seat down.

If the seat does not lift up when the seatlock release strap (“TO STOW/USE”printed on its surface) is pulled, reset asfollowing procedure.

Lift the seatback by pulling on the seat-back angle adjusting strap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK” printed on its surface).Then push the seatback down again.

4. Push the seat against the floor andmake sure it is locked securely.


91


To return the third seats, perform thefollowing procedure.

1. Pull and hold the seat lock releasestrap (“TO STOW/USE” printed on itssurface), then lift up the seat rear-ward. Push the seat forward andthen engage the front leg locks.Make sure the front legs are lockedsecurely.

If the seat does not lift up when the seatlock release strap (“TO STOW/USE”printed on its surface) is pulled, reset asfollowing procedure.

Lift the seatback by pulling on the seat-back angle adjusting strap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK” printed on its surface).Then push the seatback down again.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjustingstrap (“TO FOLD/LIFT SEATBACK”printed on its surface) and raise theseatback.


92


CAUTION

Do not sit on the third seat when itis in the stowed position as shown inthe illustration. It may cause an acci-dent or severe injury in the event ofemergency braking or collision.

CAUTION

When stowing or returning the seat,observe the following precautions inorder to prevent personal injury:



� Do not stow and return the seatswhen you are inside the vehicle inorder to prevent pinching yourhands or feet in the seat. Be sureto stow and return the seats fromoutside the vehicle.





93


Front and second seats

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Third seats—When an occupant sits onthe seat, always pull up the head restraintto the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown above.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Head restraints Armrests


94


To turn on the seat heater, move thedial upward (“L” dial for the left frontseat and “R” dial for the right frontseat). At this time, the indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the seat heat-er is operating.

Move the dial upward or downward to ad-just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial downwarduntil it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, movethe dial fully downward.

The key must be in the “ON” position tooperate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

� Persons who have delicate skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,do not use the seat heater with ablanket, cushion, or other insulatingobjects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

Seat heaters


95


Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 121 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow the child to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. It does not provide sufficientrestraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatbacks toomuch. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection when the seatbacksare in the upright position. (Referto the seat adjustment instructions.)

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions


96


� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers—they may severely weaken thebelts. (See “Cleaning the interior”on page 437 in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 121 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

—Front and rear seat belts


97


Seat belts for seats with outside arm-rests—

Fasten your belt, ensuring that the shoul-der portion of the belt passes over the topof the outside armrest and that the lapportion of the belt passes under the out-side armrest as shown.

CAUTION

Always wear the belt with the shoul-der portion over the outside armrestand the lap portion under the outsidearmrest. Failure to do so may in-crease the chance of injury in an ac-cident.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.


98


Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� For your safety, do not place theshoulder belt under your arm.

To release the belt, press the buckle−re-lease button and allow the belt to re-tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.


99


CENTER SEAT BELT OF THE THIRDSEATS

The center seat belt of the third seats isa 3−point type restraint with 2 buckles.Both seat belt buckles must be correctlylocated and securely latched for properoperation.

Make sure the buckle 1 is securelylatched for ready use of the center seatbelt of the third seats.

Two buckles and tabs for center seatbelt of the third seats

The 2 tabs have different shape for itsend so that the belt is not buckled in thewrong place.

Buckle 1—Properly matches with hookedend tabBuckle 2—Properly matches with roundend tab

CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-rectly located and securely latched.Failure to properly match the buckleand tab may cause serious injury incase of an accident or a collision.


100


To release the concave end tab, insert thekey into the hole on buckle 1 and allowthe belt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the center seat belt of thethird seats with either buckle re-leased. Fastening only the shoulderbelt or lap belt may cause seriouspersonal injury in case of a suddenbraking or a collision.

Second (7−passenger models)

Third

—Stowing seat belt buckles ofthe second and third seats


101


The seat belt buckles of the secondseats (7−passenger models) and thirdseats can be stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed beforeyou fold the seat back. (See “—Tumblingsecond seats (outer seats)” on page 66,“—Removing second seats (outer seats)”on page 73 and “—Stowing third seats” onpage 88 in this Section.)

STOWING THE CENTER SEAT BELT OFTHE THIRD SEATS

To stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the seat belt out of its cov-er. It will automatically roll back part-way. Roll the seat belt backward andinsert it into the slot of its cover asshown above. Make sure the tabs aresecurely locked in the cover.

Seat belt must be stowed before you foldthe seatback. (See “—Stowing third seats”on page 88 in this Section.)

NOTICE

Stow the center seat belt of the thirdseats except when you are wearing it.

PULLING OUT THE CENTER SEAT BELTOF THE THIRD SEATS

To use the center seat belt of the thirdseats, pull the tab (1) out, then pull thebelt out a little and pull the tab (2) outfrom the cover.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

—Stowing the center seat beltof the third seats


102


If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofvehicle accident, increasing thechance of personal injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

—Seat belt extender


103


To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle−release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle−release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the seat belt extender is nottwisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

The shoulder belt comfort guide for theoutside third seats will provide addedseat belt comfort for children who haveoutgrown child restraints and for smalladults. When the shoulder belt is in-serted through the guide, the comfortguide pulls the belt away from the neckand head of an occupant.

For wearing the seat belt, see “—Frontand rear seat belts” on page 96 in thisSection. Make sure the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

—Seat belt comfort guides


104


CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twisted andthat it lies flat.

The driver and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shockof a severe frontal impact, the front seatbelts are quickly drawn back in by theretractors so that the belts snugly restrainthe front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in case ofcollisions at certain speeds and angles.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-connecting wiring and power sources. (Fordetails, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 167 in Sec-tion 1−5.)

—Front seat beltpretensioners


105


The front seat belt pretensioner systemmainly consists of the following compo-nents and their locations are shown in theillustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. Theairbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-ing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the front seat belt pretensioners areactivated, an operating noise may beheard and a small amount of smoke−likegas may be released. This gas is harm-less and does not indicate that a fire isoccurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensionershave been activated, the seat belt retrac-tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe front seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or surround-ing area or wiring. Doing so maycause sudden operation of the frontseat belt pretensioners or disable thesystem, which could result in deathor serious personal injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries. Consult your Toyota dealerabout any repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt pretensioner assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole


106


This front seat belt pretensioner systemhas a service reminder indicator to informthe driver of operating problems. If any ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags orpretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service thevehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

� If either front seat belt does not retractor cannot be pulled out due to a mal-function or activation of the relevantfront seat belt pretensioner.

If the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe front seat belt pretensioners to op-erate.

� Either front seat belt pretensioner as-sembly or surrounding area isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s orfront passenger’s head or chest caused bydirectly hitting the steering wheel or dash-board. The front passenger airbag is acti-vated when no passenger is in the frontseat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag


107


Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS front airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags are operatingproperly.



108


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision fromthe rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard material

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.


109


The SRS airbag system mainly consists ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

5. Driver’s seat position sensor


7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor theforward deceleration of the vehicle. If animpact results in a forward decelerationbeyond the designed threshold level, thesystem triggers the airbag inflators. At thistime a chemical reaction in the inflatorsvery quickly fills the airbags with non−tox-ic gas to help restrain the forward motionof the occupants. The airbags then quicklydeflate, so that there is no obstruction ofthe driver’s vision should it be necessaryto continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can physically andsafely exit the vehicle after a collision,you should do so at the first opportunity.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head are in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.


110


CAUTION

� The SRS airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side andfront passenger side seat belt sys-tems. The front seat occupants canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 95 in this Sec-tion.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing front airbag. An infant or childwho is too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 121 in thisSection.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat because the force of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.


111


Move seat fully back

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible, because the force ofthe deploying front passenger air-bag could cause death or seriousinjury to the child.

� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean against the dooror around the door even if the childis seated in the child restraint sys-tem. It is dangerous if the side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page121 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean over the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force. Otherwiseyou may be killed or seriously in-jured. Sit up straight and well backin the seat, and always use yourseat belt properly.


112


� Do not allow a child to stand up orto kneel on the front passengerseat, since the front airbag inflateswith considerable speed and force.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 121 in this Sec-tion.

� Do not put objects or your pets onor in front of the dashboard orsteering wheel pad that houses thefront airbag system. They might re-strict inflation or cause death orserious injury as they are projectedrearward by the force of the deploy-ing airbags. Likewise, the driverand front passenger should nothold objects in their arms or ontheir knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag or airbagsensor assembly. Doing so maycause sudden SRS front airbaginflation or disable the system,which could result in death or seri-ous injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepairs and modifications.


113


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has a ser-vice reminder indicator to inform the driverof operating problems. If either of the fol-lowing conditions occurs, this indicates amalfunction of the airbags. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible to ser-vice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the light remains on.


In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor dashboard (shaded in the illustra-tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.


114


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver and all win-dow−side passengers in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help to reduce injuries mainly tothe driver’s or front passenger’s chest andthe SRS curtain shield airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s andall window−side passengers’ heads. TheSRS side airbag and curtain shield airbagon the passenger side are activated evenwith no passenger in the seat.

The curtain shield airbags may activateeven when the side airbags are not acti-vated.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are inflated.

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


115


CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To avoid potential death or se-rious injury when they inflate, thedriver and all window−side passen-gers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirback upright and against the seat atall times.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not inflate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.


116


Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not designed to inflate ifthe vehicle is involved in a front orrear collision, if it rolls over, or if it isinvolved in a low−speed side collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.


2. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

4. Curtain shield airbag sensors

5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag and curtain shield airbag inflat-ors and/or the curtain shield airbag inflat-ors. At this time a chemical reaction inthe inflators quickly fills the airbags withnon−toxic gas to help restrain the lateralmotion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.


117


Front seats as well as parts of all thepillars, and roof side may be hot for sev-eral minutes, but the airbags themselveswill not be hot. The airbags are designedto inflate only once.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side, andall window−side passenger side seatbelt systems. To ensure maximumprotection in an accident, the driverand all passengers in the vehiclemust wear their seat belts. Wearinga seat belt during an accident re-duces the chances of death or seri-ous injury or being thrown out ofthe vehicle. For instructions andprecautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” onpage 95 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by a deployingairbag. An infant or child who istoo small to use a seat belt shouldbe properly secured using a childrestraint system. Toyota stronglyrecommends that all infants andchildren be placed in the rear seatof the vehicle and properly re-strained. The rear seat is the safestfor infants and children. For in-structions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 121 in thisSection.

� Do not allow a child to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the side window or the areaof the seat, pillar or roof side fromwhich the side airbag and curtainshield airbag deploy even if he/sheis seated in the child restraint sys-tem. It is dangerous if the side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page121 in this Section.


118


� Do not lean against the door whenthe vehicle is in use, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate with considerable speed andforce. Otherwise, you may be killedor seriously injured. Special careshould be taken especially whenyou have a small child in the ve-hicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of the frontseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

� Do not get your head closer to thearea where the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, sincethese airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured. Special care should be takenespecially when you have a smallchild in the vehicle.

� Do not allow a child to kneel on theseat facing the side window, sincethe side airbag and curtain shieldairbag inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.


119


� Do not get your head or hands outof windows and do not allow achild to do so. Since the curtainshield airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force, you may bekilled or seriously injured.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thepart where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andside pillars, roof side and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownwith great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.


120


� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seats withside airbags. Such changes maydisable the system or cause theside airbags to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront pillar and roof side rail con-taining the curtain shield airbags.Such changes may disable the sys-tem or cause the curtain shield air-bags to inflate accidentally, result-ing in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole

This SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system has a service reminderindicator to inform the driver of operatingproblems. If either of the followingconditions occurs, this indicates amalfunction of the airbags. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the light remains on.



121


In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front and side pillarsand roof side rail garnishes (padding)containing the curtain shield airbags in-side (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of childrestraint systems for children smallenough to use them.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 95 for details.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


122


CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.


� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean against the sidewindows or around the side win-dows even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, becausethe impact could cause death orserious injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured.


123


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.



� After installing the child restraintsystem, make sure it is secured inplace following the manufacturer’sinstructions. If it is not restrainedsecurely, it may cause death or se-rious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system


124


Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 135 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 138 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

—Types of child restraintsystem


125


(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear−facingposition only.

CAUTION


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.This can cause death or serious in-jury to the child and passengerssitting in front (or second) seats incase of a sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.

—Installation with seat belt


126


Same angle

� When installing a child restraintsystem in the third seat centerposition, align both seatbacks atthe same angle. Otherwise, thechild restraint system cannot be se-curely restrained and this maycause death or serious injuries in acollision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the child restraint system untilthe seat belt is fixed.


127


2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.


128


4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’s in-structions about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling the child restraint system.

CAUTION



129





� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.This can cause death or serious in-jury to the child and passengerssitting in front (or second) seats incase of a sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the second rightseat.


130


Same angle


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION





131


2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt to retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.


132


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forward−fac-ing position only.



133


CAUTION



Same angle


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 95 in this Section for details.


134


CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder. Fail-ure to do so could reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand cause serious injuries in a col-lision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on achild’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.


� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.


2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle−release button and al-low the belt to retract.


135


Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets


Anchor brackets


Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe second seats to attach the top strap.

Anchor bracket is installed for each sec-ond seating position.

—Using a top strap (for second seats)


136


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 121 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

3. Replace the head restraint.


137


Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets on the back ofthe third seats to attach the top strap.

Anchor bracket is installed for right sideand center seating position.

TO USE THE ANCHORAGES:

1. Remove the head restraint.

—Using a top strap (for third seats)


138


2. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 121 in this Section.

CAUTION

� Do not replace the head restraintwhen the child restraint system isinstalled. The head restraint may in-terfere with the top strap and thechild restraint system can not besecurely restrained. This may causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

� Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the childrestraint system is secure by push-ing and pulling it in different direc-tions. Follow all the installation in-structions provided by its manufac-turer.



—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages(for second seats)


139


Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the seatcushion of each second seat.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

1st lockposition

5th lockposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback. Make surethe rear seat legs are relocked intoplace (folding down the seatback willdisengage them) by pushing down-ward on the back of the seat. Adjustthe seatback to the 1st lock position(most upright position) and then tothe 5th lock position.

Make sure the seat and seatback islocked securely.

Canada only

Type A (anchor position indicated bybuttons)


140


Canada only

Type A (anchor position indicated bytags)

Canada only

Type B (anchor position indicated bybuttons)

Canada only

Type B (anchor position indicated bytags)


141


2. Turn up the covers for the lower an-chorages. Confirm the position ofthe lower anchorages near the but-tons or tags on the seatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for second seats)” on page135 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second seat if it inter-feres with the lock mechanism ofthe front seats. This can causedeath or serious injury to the childand front passenger in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of the right and center seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages(for third seats)


142


1st lockposition

11th lockposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back tothe 1st lock position (most uprightposition) until it locks into place.Adjust the seatback to the 11th lockposition.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-ly.

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B


143


2. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap (for third seats)” on page 137in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never recline the seat.

� Do not put a child restraint systemon the third seat if it interferes withthe lock mechanism of the secondseats. This can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child and frontpassenger in case of sudden brak-ing or a collision.

To adjust the steering wheel position,push down the lock release lever. Thentilt the steering wheel to the desiredangle, push or pull it to the desiredsteering column length and pull up thelock release lever.

Tilt and telescopic steeringwheel


144


CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

Vehicles with the auto anti−glare insiderear view mirror—On some models, whenthe inside rear view mirror surface dark-ens in “AUTO” mode, the outside rearview mirror surface also darkens to re-duce the reflection of the headlights of thevehicle behind you. (For details, see “Autoanti−glare inside rear view mirror” on page146 in this Section.)

On some models, when you push the rearwindow defogger switch, the heater panelsin the outside rear view mirrors will quick-ly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rearwindow and outside rear view mirror de-foggers and windshield wiper de−icer” onpage 161 in Section 1−4.)

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch ison.

Outside rear view mirrors—


145


To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirrors, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol —Folding rear view mirrors


146


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror


147


In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pushthe “OFF” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,push the “AUTO” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

On vehicles with the vanity lights, the lightwill come on when you open the cover.

VANITY LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is turned off andvanity light stays lighting on, the light willcut off automatically after 20 minutes.

Vanity mirrors


148


You can cancel the cut off operation by:

� Turning the key to the “ACC” position.

� Opening or closing any of front andsliding doors.

� Turning off all the “ON” lights.

All the lights are cut off when all the sidedoors and back door are locked by key orwireless remote control transmitter.

The ignition switch must be turned off.


149


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight beam level control 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front personal lights 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear personal lights 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers and windshield

wiper de−icer 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4


150


HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “ ” (lock) switch of the wirelessremote control transmitter is pushed whenall the side doors and back door are al-ready locked, the lights automatically turnoff immediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system(all models sold in Canada and somemodels sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the headlightscome on when:

� The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position orposition 1.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)


151


High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)


152


The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “ ” (lock) switch of the wirelessremote control transmitter is pushed whenall the side doors and back door are al-ready locked, the lights automatically turnoff immediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system(all models sold in Canada and somemodels sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the headlightscome on when:

� The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position,position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto position 2 or position 3 with the head-lights on, or turn the ignition switch off.


153


High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

To adjust the headlight beam level, turnthe dial.

The following list shows examples of prop-er switch settings. For loading conditionsother than those listed, adjust the dialposition so that the beam level is thesame as the one obtained according tothe list when only the driver is in thevehicle. The higher the number of the dialposition, the lower the headlight beam lev-el.

Always keep the headlight beam at theproper level, or your headlights maydazzle other road users.

Headlight beam level control


154


To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

Loading condition and dial position

VariationsLoading conditions

7−passengermodels

8−passengermodels

0 0

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 2

Driver only, or Driver + one passenger in the front seat

Driver + one passenger in the front seat andall passengers in the second seat

All passengers

All passengers + full luggage loading to theluggage compartment

Driver + full luggage loading to the luggagecompartment

Emergency flashers


155


NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights


156


Personal light main switch

To turn on the front personal lights,operate the personal light main switch.The lights can be turned on or off bypushing each lens when the personallight main switch is in the “DOOR” or“OFF” position.

The personal light main switch has thefollowing positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or offby pushing each lens.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors or back door is opened.When all the side doors and back doorare closed, the lights can be turned on oroff by pushing each lens.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors or back door is opened, thelight will come on. After all the side doorsand back door are closed, the light re-mains on for about 15 seconds beforefading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

Front personal lights


157



� Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Cancelling the ignition switch linked op-eration.

� Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at “DOOR” positionfor 20 minutes or more.


To turn on the rear personal lights, op-erate the personal light main switch.The lights can be turned on or off bypushing each lens when the personallight main switch is in the “DOOR”position.


“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe sliding doors or back door is opened.When both the sliding doors and backdoor are closed, the lights can be turnedon or off by pushing each lens.

Rear personal lights


158



To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, push the luggage compartmentlight switch upwards. The light turn onwhen the personal light main switch isin the “ON” or “DOOR” position.


“ON”—The light turns on when the lug-gage compartment switch is pushed up-wards.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when the lug-gage compartment switch is pushed up-wards and any of the sliding door or backdoor is opened. The light goes off whenboth the sliding doors and back door areclosed.

For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors and back door isopened or when the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK” position.

The light remains on for about 15 secondsafter all the side doors and back door areclosed.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

Luggage compartment light Ignition switch light


159


When any of the side doors or back dooris unlocked using either the key or thewireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.


� Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 20 minutes or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

With interval adjuster: The “INT TIME”band lets you adjust the wiping time inter-val when the wiper lever is in the intermit-tent position (position 1). Twist the bandupward to increase the time betweensweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 479 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Windshield wipers and washer


160


When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 479 inSection 7−3.

NOTICE

� Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratchthe glass.

� Do not lift the rear wiper arm awayfrom the window, as it may break.

Rear window wiper andwasher


161


To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurfaces. An indicator light will illuminateto indicate the defogger is operating.

On some models, the rear view mirrordefoggers and/or the windshield wiper de−icer is also operating simultaneously bythis switch. Vehicles with the outside rearview mirror defoggers, the heater panel inthe outside rear view mirrors will quicklyclear the surfaces. Vehicles with the wind-shield wiper de−icer, the windshield wiperblades will be de−iced.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defoggers have operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear or the wiperblades have de−iced. Leaving the defog-gers on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers andwindshield wiper de−icer


162



163


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5


164


Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the fuel gauge returns to “E” when theignition switch is turned to the “START”position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


165


� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the engine coolant temperature gaugereturns to “C” when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 410 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer returns to the bottomposition when the ignition switch is turnedto the “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Tachometer


166


This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—It shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters


167


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) or If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

(g) Stop and check.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers


168



(h) orTake vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all doors.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(l) Adjust tire pressure. If the light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

(m) Add washer fluid.

(n) Replace engine oil.


169



(o) Dynamic laser cruise controlmaster warning light

Check the condition according to the warning code. If the system malfunctions, contactToyota dealer.

(p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.


170


(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following case:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the reminder light flashes and buzzersounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fas-tened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,the light keeps flashing and the buzzerstops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up thefront passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the reminder light flashes if a passengersits in the front passenger seat and doesnot fastened. However, if a front passen-ger uses an additional seat cushion, thelight may not flash even when the seatbelt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight and how it is placed on the seat,built−in sensors in the seat cushion maydetect the pressure, causing the reminderlight to come on.


171


(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio, etc., and drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase with theaccelerator pedal depressed down, theremay be a problem somewhere in yourelectronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 446in Section 6.


172


(f) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(g) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

Vehicles without the vehicle stabilitycontrol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operatebut the brake assist system still operates.In this case, the wheels could lock upduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.


� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.


173


Vehicles with the vehicle stability con-trol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem works properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle stability control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.




CAUTION



(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doorsare completely closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the system of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, front seat belt preten-sioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.



174


(k) “VSC” Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off aftera few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC” warning light comes on even if the“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure ofany one of the tires is critically low. Thelight comes on when the ignition key isturned to the “ON” position. It goes offafter a few seconds. This indicates thatthe low tire pressure warning system isfunctioning properly.

If the light comes on while driving, adjusttire inflation pressure to the specified lev-el. (See “Tires” on page 491 in Section 8.)After the tire inflation pressure is adjusted,the light should go off after driving atleast 30 km/h (19 mph) for some time. Ifthe light still remains or blinks once everysecond, have the low tire pressure warn-ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

If the light blinks twice every second, thelow tire pressure warning system needs tobe initialized.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 188 in Section 1−6.

(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 479 inSection 7−3.)

(n) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light reminds you when to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 8000 km (5000miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutreplacing the engine oil, and if the dis-tance driven exceeds 12000 km (7500miles), the light will come on after theignition key is turned to “ON” position.The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.


175


The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 166 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset button.

Hold down the button for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(o) Dynamic Laser Cruise Control Mas-ter Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the dynamic laser cruisecontrol system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and go off after afew seconds.

When the light comes on, the alarmsounds and the warning code will appearon the display. At this time, dynamic lasercruise control is cancelled. For details,see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 195 in Section 1−6.

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” and “VSC” warn-ing lights, low tire pressure warninglight, dynamic laser cruise masterwarning light and engine oil replace-ment reminder light go off after a fewseconds. The SRS warning light goesoff after about 6 seconds. (“TRACOFF”, “READY” (dynamic laser cruiseready mode) indicator lights and slipindicator light also comes on and gooff after a few seconds.)

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.


176



177


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch with steering lock 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic laser cruise controll 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6


178


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 393 in Section3.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer, fuel gauge or enginecoolant temperature gauge returns to thebottom position when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleon the instrument panel may move whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the keyfrom “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. Theselector lever must be put in the “P” posi-tion before pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 13in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock


179


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and keyremoval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission

Selector lever

Shift normally.

Shift with the brake pedaldepressed. (The ignition switchmust be in “ON” position.)


180


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 394 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low, the transmis-sion will not shift into the overdrive geareven in the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Shift into the “4” position. The trans-mission will downshift to fourth gearand engine braking will be enabled.

� Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models141 km/h (88 mph)

All−wheel drive models137 km/h (86 mph)

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.



� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.



Vehicles with cruise control or dynamiclaser cruise control—When the cruise con-trol is being used, even if you downshiftfrom “D” to “4”, engine braking will not beenabled because the cruise control is notcancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 192 or “Dy-namic laser cruise control” on page 195in this Section.


181


CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,you can start the vehicle in motion aswith the lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models“3” 90 km/h (56 mph). . . . . . . . . . “2” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . . . . “L” 32 km/h (20 mph). . . . . . . . . .

All−wheel drive models“3” 87 km/h (54 mph). . . . . . . . . . “2” 56 km/h (35 mph). . . . . . . . . . “L” 30 km/h (19 mph). . . . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “4” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

Vehicles with rear view monitor system—

When the selector lever is shifted into “R”position with the ignition switch in the“ON” position, rear view monitor systemwill activate. For instructions, see “Rearview monitor system” on page 337 in Sec-tion 1−9.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.


182


CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between fourth gear andoverdrive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-tion. Be sure to shift the selector leverto the “D” position immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 429 in Section 4.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of frontwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against front wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

Traction control system(two−wheel drive models)


183


NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the traction control system is in theself−check mode, but does not indicate amalfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of thefront wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer. TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in a ditchwhen you are driving on a severe offroad and sand, turn off the tractioncontrol system. This system that con-trols engine performance interferes withthe process of freeing your wheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon.

The vehicle stability control system is al-ways activated, even if the traction controlsystem is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switchonce again.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.


184


“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on fora few seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the “TRAC OFF” switch toturn off the system.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

� The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.







The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC” warning light comeson even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is notpushed.


185


The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of 4wheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against 4 wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the traction control system is in theself−check mode, but does not indicate amalfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of the4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-tor light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

Traction control system(all−wheel drive models)


186



This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.







The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as an anti−lock brakesystem, brake assist system, tractioncontrol, engine control, etc. This sys-tem automatically controls the brakesand engine to help prevent the vehiclefrom skidding when cornering on a slip-pery road surface or operating steeringwheel abruptly.

This system activates when the vehiclespeed is about more than 15 km/h (9mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the system is in the self−check mode,but does not indicate a malfunction.

Vehicle stability controlsystem


187


CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightflashes, an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 466 in Section 7−2.)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.


This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or the traction control system.




188






Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC” warning light comes on even if the“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

The tire pressure warning system is de-signed to provide warning when tirepressure of any one of the tires is criti-cally low while the vehicle is moving.The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on to inform you that such lowtire pressure may hamper driving.

This system is not designed to operatewhen the vehicle is stopped. Therefore,check the tire pressure regularly. The rec-ommended cold tire pressure, tire sizeand the vehicle capacity weight are on thetire pressure label. (For instructions, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” on page463 in Section 7−2.)

Installed tires should be of the specifiedsize. They should be of the same sizeand construction. If tires other than thespecified size are used, or if tires of dif-ferent sizes or constructions are mixed,the tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. It goes offafter a few seconds. This indicates thatthe tire pressure warning system is func-tioning properly.

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on or blinks while driving, dothe following.

If the warning light comes on:

Vehicles with standard tires—

Adjust the tire pressure to the specifiedlevel as soon as possible. (See “Tires”on page 491 in Section 8.)

Tire pressure warning system


189


Once the ignition switch is turned off, thewarning light also goes off. If the lightcomes on again when the vehicle isstarted after adjusting the tire pressure tothe specified level, have the tire pressurewarning system checked at your Toyotadealer.

If you have a flat tire, replace it with thespare tire. For details, see “If you havea flat tire” on page 411 in Section 4.

Vehicles with run−flat tires—

Decelerate at a speed below 90 km/h(55 mph), then adjust the tire pressureto the specified level as soon as pos-sible. Do not drive more than 160 km(100 miles).

� When the tire pressure is below 140kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 20 psi), con-sult your Toyota dealer. If the tire isflat or the tire pressure is below 100kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 15 psi), thetire must be replaced. Do not use therepaired tire.

� When the tire pressure is 140 kPa (1.4kgf/cm2 or bar, 20 psi) or more, adjustit to specified level. (See “Tires” onpage 491 in Section 8.)

Once the ignition switch is turned off,the warning light also goes off. If thelight comes on again when the vehicleis started after adjusting the tire pres-sure to the specified level, have thetire pressure warning system checkedat your Toyota dealer.

For details about the run−flat tires, see“Run−flat tires” on page 469 in Section7−2.

If the warning light blinks once everysecond:

The low tire pressure warning system maybe malfunctioning. Contact your Toyotadealer.

If the warning light blinks twice everysecond:

The low tire pressure warning systemneeds to be initialized. Reset the systemwith the tire pressure warning system re-set switch. (To reset the system, see“TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMRESET SWITCH”.)

The tire pressure warning system doesnot function properly under certain cir-cumstances. In the following cases, thelow tire pressure warning light may notcome on even if the tire pressure islow, or it may come on when the tirepressure is actually normal.

� The tread wear is uneven among thetires.

� A compact spare tire, snow tires, ortire chains are used.

� The tire pressure is excessively higherthan specified, or tire pressure sudden-ly drops due to bursting or othercauses.

� The vehicle is driven on a slipperyroad surface such as rough or frozenroads.

� The vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h(19 mph) or more than 100 km/h (62mph), and the driving duration is lessthan 5 minutes.

� The tires differ in tread pattern ormanufacturer.

� The tires are not the specified size.

� The tread wear is very different amongthe installed tires.

� The pressure of two or more tiresdrops at the same time.


190


� Rapid acceleration/deceleration orsharp turns is continue.

� Towing a trailer.

� The loading is over the limit or imbal-anced.

� Initialization was not performed correct-ly after replacing or rotating tires orwheels.

CAUTION

When the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, observe the following in-structions:

� Vehicles with the standard tires—Adjust the tire pressure to the spe-cified level as soon as possible.

� Vehicles with the run−flat tires—Decelerate as soon as possible tothe lowest appropriate speed thatconditions permit. Do not drive forlonger than 160 km (100 miles) orover 90 km/h (55 mph).

� Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-vering and braking. If the vehicletires deteriorate, you could losecontrol of the steering wheel or thebrakes, causing death or serious in-jury.

Note: The tire pressure warning sys-tem on your vehicle will warn youwhen one of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated and when some com-binations of your tires are significant-ly under−inflated. However, there areother combinations of significantlyunder−inflated tires for which yourtire pressure warning system may notwarm you. These other combinationsare relatively common, accounting forapproximately half the instances inwhich vehicles have significantly un-der−inflated tires. For example, yoursystem may not warm you when bothtires on the same side or on thesame axle of your vehicle are signifi-cantly under−inflated. It is particularlyimportant, therefore, for you to checkthe tire pressure in all of your tiresregularly and maintain proper pres-sure.

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMRESET SWITCH

The tire pressure warning system needto be initialized in the following condi-tions:

� When the low tire pressure warninglight blinks twice every second

� After replacing or rotating tires orwheels

When initializing the system, the pres-ent tire condition is stored as a stan-dard.


191


To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe place andapply the parking brake. Stop the en-gine.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified level. (See “Tires”on page 491 in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

4. Push and hold the reset switch untilthe low tire pressure warning lightblinks three times.

5. Initialization is completed after drivingat the speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) orover for about 8 hours total, when thetire pressure warning system detectsthe normal tire pressure.

When initializing the system, make surethe low tire pressure warning light blinksthree times. If the warning light does notblink three times, initializing will be failedand the tire pressure warning system willnot function properly.

Do not push the reset switch without ad-justing the tire pressure to the specifiedlevel. Otherwise, the low tire pressurewarning light may not come on even if thetire pressure is low, or it may come onwhen the tire pressure is actually normal.

If you push the reset switch while thevehicle is moving, initialization is not per-formed.

If the low tire pressure warning light doesnot blink when you push and hold thereset switch, have the low pressure warn-ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

When the warning light blinks twice everysecond while driving, you may be unableto reset the system. In this case, set thesystem again according to the above pro-cedure.


192


Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

Parking brake Cruise control


193


TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er press will turn the system completelyoff.

When the ignition is turned off, the systemis also automatically turned off. To usecruise control again, press the “ON−OFF”button again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON−OFF” buttonoff when not using the cruise control.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.


194


If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it.b.Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, withthe cruise control on, engine braking willnot be enabled because the cruise controlis not cancelled. To decrease the vehiclespeed, reset to a slower speed with thecruise control lever or depress the brakepedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruisecontrol is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON−OFF” buttonto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


195


Dynamic laser cruise control allows youto drive at a selected cruising speedover about 45 km/h (28 mph) with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal, maintain-ing an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicledistance.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control in order to avoidserious injury or death, or to preventaccidents or to control the vehicle’sspeed in emergency situations. Donot use cruise control except in ap-propriate road and traffic conditions.Always drive carefully and attentively.Before using dynamic laser cruisecontrol, read and understand the fol-lowing instructions.

Steering wheel

Instrument cluster

1. Cruise control switch

2. Distance switch

3. Display

4. “NORM.” indicator light (conventional cruise control modeindicator light)

5. “CRUISE” indicator light

6. “READY” indicator light (ready mode indicator light)

7. Master warning light

Dynamic laser cruise control—


196


Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion has two cruise control modes.

� Vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode for maintaining an appropriatedistance between vehicles

� Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode for cruising at preset speeds

You can change the mode by using thecontrol lever.

The two cruise control modes function dif-ferently. If you use dynamic laser cruisecontrol, always confirm which mode is se-lected.

For the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode, see “—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode” on page 196. For the con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode, see “—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode” on page 207.

The laser radar sensor in this systemprimarily detects the reflectors of thevehicle ahead of you to determine thepresence of the vehicle ahead as wellas measuring the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance. The detection range of the sen-sor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.

CAUTION

Dynamic laser cruise control is not acollision−avoidance system and willnot prevent accidents. Dynamic lasercruise control is a vehicle speed con-trol device that is intended for useonly on freeways or roads where thetraffic is light or moderate. To avoidserious injury, you must use cautionand be attentive to road and trafficconditions while using dynamic lasercruise control.

—Dynamic laser cruise controlmodes

—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode


197


DYNAMIC LASER CRUISE CONTROLOPERATIONS

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion operates automatically and depend-ing on whether a vehicle is detectedahead may change the speed of yourvehicle as follows.

If no vehicle is running ahead of you—

1. Cruising at a fixed speed: If there isno vehicle detected ahead, yourcruising speed is maintained at thepreset speed from about 45 km/h (28mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). Thepreset speed is displayed in thedisplay. For the vehicle speed setting,see “SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED”on page 201.

If a vehicle is detected ahead of you—

2. Deceleration cruising function: If aslower moving vehicle is detectedahead of you, your vehicle cruisingspeed decreases within the range ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135km/h (85 mph). The display shows thepreset speed, the detected vehicleahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicledistance. If your vehicle gets closer tothe vehicle ahead because of insuffi-cient automatic deceleration, then thealarm warns you to also manually ap-ply brakes.

3. Follow−up cruising function: After de-celeration, your vehicle cruising speedchanges in proportion to the speed ofthe vehicle ahead to maintain an ap-propriate distance from your vehicle tothe vehicle ahead. The vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance can be changed. For de-tails, see “CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCE” on page 203.

4. Acceleration cruising function: If thevehicle ahead changes lanes, your ve-hicle cruising speed will be graduallyincreased up to the preset speed, andyour vehicle resumes fixed−speedcruising.


198


This system operates by detecting pri-marily the reflectors of the vehicleahead. The distance may not be accu-rately or absolutely detected in the fol-lowing cases:

� The vehicle ahead has higher groundclearance, which means that theplacement of the reflectors is in ahigher position.

� The rear section of the vehicle aheadis extremely dirty.

� The vehicle ahead or other vehiclesaround you are flinging up water orsnow.

� Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke)is coming from the vehicle ahead orother vehicles around you, obscuringyour front view.

� There is an obstruction (protectivefilm, sticker, etc.) on the reflectorson the vehicle ahead, or reflectorsare not installed on the vehicleahead or are damaged.

� Heavy luggage in the luggagecompartment or rear seats is caus-ing the nose of your vehicle to tiltup.

CAUTION

To avoid accidents, always keep thelaser radar sensor glass clean andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front. (See “LASERRADAR SENSOR” on page 205.)

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control. Observe the fol-lowing precautions in order to avoidserious injury or death:

� Under certain conditions where thevehicle in front slows drastically, oris stopped, the dynamic laser cruisecontrol will neither warn you nordecelerate. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that suffi-cient vehicle−to−vehicle distance ismaintained.

� Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol in the following conditions:

In bad weather (such as rain, fog,snow, sandstorms or direct sun-light, or when raindrops or snow-flakes get on the laser radar sensorglass), the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance will not be measured accura-tely.

When using the windshield wipersat high or low speeds the dynamiclaser radar cruise control turns off.


199


On roads with heavy traffic orsharp bends, an appropriate speedcannot be maintained and an acci-dent may occur.

On slippery road surfaces (icy orsnow−covered road surfaces), thetires will race and you will be un-able to control the vehicle.

When there is no vehicle detectedahead on steep downhill slopes, thepreset speed will be easily exceed-ed because of inefficient enginebraking. (In this case, automaticbraking will not work.) If there is avehicle detected ahead, the delay indeceleration timing could cause se-rious injury or death.

When the alarm sounds frequently(because acceleration or decelera-tion was repeated or sufficient ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance was notmaintained), an appropriate vehiclespeed cannot be attained and anaccident may occur.

On roads with steep and short in-clines and declines, failure to de-tect the vehicle ahead will shortenthe distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead and an acci-dent may occur.

� Deceleration cruising function andapproach warning do not operatewhen the vehicle ahead is at a stopor driving very slowly.

� If the vehicle ahead of you deceler-ates abruptly or if another vehiclecuts in ahead of you, your vehiclemay collide with the vehicle aheadunless you manually depress thebrake pedal to slow down your ve-hicle.

� Depending on the road configura-tion (curved, left and right continu-ous curved, the start or end of acurve, or narrow driving lanes dueto road construction) or your ve-hicle condition (steering wheel ma-neuvering, position in the lane, orunstable driving because of an acci-dent or breakdown), vehicles in oth-er lanes or surrounding objectsmay be detected, resulting in a con-trol failure or the approach warningactivation. This may also result ina very close distance between vehi-cles due to a failure to detect thevehicle ahead.


200


Dynamic laser cruise control should notbe used in circumstances which are inap-propriate for any cruise control, such asentering free way on−ramps or off−ramps.

CAUTION

� Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol when exiting from or whenentering or merging onto a freeway.When you are following a slowermoving vehicle and exiting, the sen-sor does not detect the vehicle andwill accelerate to the preset speed.

� If other vehicles are driving outsideof the laser radar detection range,a delay in the detection of the ve-hicle cutting in at short range orfailure to detect a motorcycle run-ning on the side of the same lanewill occur. In this case, the dynamiclaser cruise control system will notfunction properly.

� When a slower vehicle in front ofyou leaves the lane, the dynamiclaser cruise control will no longerdetect a vehicle ahead and will at-tempt to accelerate the vehicle tothe faster preset speed.


To operate dynamic laser cruise control,press the “ON−OFF” button. This turns thesystem on. When the “CRUISE” and“READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster come on, you can now set yourdesired cruising speed and vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance. Pressing the “ON−OFF”button again will turn the system com-pletely off.

When the ignition is turned off, the systemis also automatically turned off. To usedynamic laser cruise control again, pressthe “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.


201


When the ignition is turned off, all thepreset data is cleared. When you use thedynamic laser cruise control again, youneed to reset the data.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”button off when not using the dynam-ic laser cruise control.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. At this time, the displayindicates settings such as the preset ve-hicle speed, whether a vehicle is presentahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance. If there is no vehicle detectedahead, the display does not indicate thevehicle ahead. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe control prior to acceleration.

You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates one ofthe warning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3”. Ifany of the above codes appears on thedisplay, see “VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE CONTROL MODE FAILUREWARNING” on page 206.


You can cancel the preset speed by doingany of the following:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.

If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”indicator comes on and the dynamic lasercruise control enters the ready mode.

If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicatorlight goes off in the instrument panel. Inthis case, the preset speed data iscleared, and you must set the speed fromthe beginning.


202


In the following cases, the preset speedautomatically cancels out:

a. The vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph). (40 km/h (25 mph) isdesignated as a cancel speed.)

b. The slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds. (This occurs when thevehicle is about to skid.)

If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”indicator comes on and the dynamic lasercruise control enters the ready mode.

If one of the warning codes “E1”, “E2” or“E3” appears on the display, the presetspeed automatically cancels out. See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” onpage 206.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above reasons, donot operate the dynamic laser cruise con-trol. Although there is no problem to con-tinue driving, please contact your Toyotadealer.


Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. The displayed speed will in-crease in increments of 5 mph (for theU.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually in-crease to the display speed.


CAUTION

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol is on, your cruising speed isregulated in proportion to the speedof the vehicle ahead, so increasingthe preset speed using the controllever does not accelerate the vehicle.However, if the vehicle ahead leavesthe lane, your cruising speed will in-crease to the preset speed becausethe preset speed has been set higherusing the control lever. Confirm thesetting on the display.


Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. The displayed speed willdecrease in increments of 5 mph (for theU.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually de-crease to the display speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

If the control lever is released when thevehicle speed exceeds the upper limit ofthe preset speed traveling downhill whileyou are pushing the lever down, the sys-tem will memorize the upper limit of thepreset speed as a preset speed.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4” inthe vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode, engine braking will not be enabledbecause this mode is not cancelled. Todecrease the vehicle speed, reset to aslower speed with the cruise control leveror depress the brake pedal. If you use thebrake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.


203



If the preset speed has been cancelled,when you push the lever up in the“+ RES” direction while the “READY” indi-cator in the instrument cluster comes onat a vehicle speed of more than 40 km/h(25 mph), the speed set prior to cancella-tion will be restored.

During follow−up cruising, if there are novehicles ahead because they havechanged lanes, your vehicle will accelerategradually up to the preset speed. At thistime, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction will quickly speed up your ve-hicle in vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode.

CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE

You can select one of the following ve-hicle−to−vehicle distances.

1. LONG2. MIDDLE3. SHORT

Each time you pull the distance switchbriefly toward you, the setting changesfrom LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT andthen back to LONG. You can confirm thesetting on the display.

Your vehicle speed changes in proportionto the speed of the vehicle ahead, main-taining the selected distance. However, ifthe vehicle ahead is slower, the selecteddistance will be shorter than the desig-nated distance.

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-trol mode is activated or the “READY”indicator comes on, the vehicle−to−vehicledistance setting can be changed.

The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is alwaysset to LONG when the ignition switch isturned on.


204


Select the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-sidering traffic conditions. The approximatevehicle−to−vehicle distance based on timeinterval when driving at 88 km/h (55 mph)is shown below:

LONG about 75 m (245 ft.). . . . . . . . . . . MIDDLE about 50 m (165 ft.). . . . . . . . . . SHORT about 30 m (100 ft.). . . . . . . . . .

If the vehicle speed is slower than 88km/h (55 mph), the distance will be short-er than the above.

During long downhill driving, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be shorter thanthe selected distance. BRAKING CONTROL

Dynamic laser cruise control is not a colli-sion avoidance system. If the approachwarning is activated, depress the brakepedal to decelerate to ensure an appropri-ate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.

If you are getting closer to the vehicleahead at a relatively higher speed thanthat of the vehicle ahead or if enginebraking cannot be applied properly, brak-ing control is automatically activated. Atthis time, the display flashes.

Braking control is operating only when thevehicle−to−vehicle distance control modeis selected and your vehicle speed ex-ceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph). If thespeed decreases below about 40 km/h (25mph), braking control will cease, requiringthe manual application of brakes.

CAUTION

Braking control will not ensure thatyour vehicle will reduce speed ap-propriately. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that sufficientvehicle−to−vehicle distance is main-tained.

APPROACH WARNING

While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, if the ve-hicle ahead decelerates abruptly or ifanother vehicle cuts in ahead of you, in-adequate braking will make your vehiclebecome closer to the vehicle ahead of youand the display will flash and beep.


205


CAUTION

� If the display flashes and beeps,you must depress the brake pedalto slow down to avoid a collisionor maintain sufficient vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance.

� In the following conditions, the ap-proach warning may not turn oneven if the vehicle drives closer tothe vehicle ahead, and an accidentmay occur:

Your vehicle and the vehicle aheadare cruising at almost the samespeed.

The vehicle ahead is cruising at afaster speed than yours. (The dis-tance between the vehicles will be-come longer.)

The vehicle ahead is at a stop ordriving very slowly. Pay specialattention to a very slow vehicle atthe end of the line in heavy trafficor at a tollgate.

The speed has just been set.

The accelerator pedal is depressedor has just been released.

LASER RADAR SENSOR

The laser radar sensor is used for ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control cruis-ing.

If dirt is on the sensor glass, thedynamic laser cruise control function isautomatically cancelled and a warningcode appears on the display. (See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING”on page 206.)

However, if the glass sensor is coveredwith icicle or any substance, dirt maynot be detected.

Before driving in the vehicle−to−vehicledistance control mode, make sure theradar sensor glass is clean.

This product is a class I laser productcomplied with 21 C.F.R part 1040.10and 1040.11.

CAUTION

To ensure that dynamic laser cruisecontrol will function properly whiledriving, observe the following:

� Always keep the laser radar sensorglass clean. When cleaning, use asoft cloth and be careful not todamage the sensor.

� Avoid strong impacts around the la-ser radar sensor. An incorrect laserradar sensor alignment will result insystem malfunction. A special de-vice is required to adjust the laserradar sensor alignment. Be sure tohave the sensor adjusted by yourToyota dealer.

� Do not affix a sticker (including atransparent sticker) or attach an ac-cessory around the laser radar sen-sor.


206


VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble somewhere in the dy-namic laser cruise control while the ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control mode ison, the master warning light comes onand the alarm sounds, and one of thewarning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3” will ap-pear on the display. Dynamic laser cruisecontrol is automatically cancelled.

If “E3” appears on the display, the“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrumentcluster also flashes.

If “E1” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty laserradar sensor glass while the dynamic la-ser cruise control is on.

If this code appears, clean the sensorglass with a soft cloth and try setting thepreset speed again. If the dirt is removedwithout cleaning, the system will automati-cally enter the ready mode.

If the system does not enter the readymode even after cleaning or the code re-mains on the display, the system might bemalfunctioning. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Always keep the sensor glass andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front.

If “E2” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the followingconditions:

� The wipers are operating at high or lowspeeds

� Direct sunlight from the front

� It is difficult to make a measurementbecause of bad weather (such as rainy,foggy, or snowy weather)

In the following cases, dynamic lasercruise control switches to the ready mode:

� The wipers are stopped or areswitched to intermittent operation.

� No direct sunlight from the front

In the above conditions, push the lever upin the “+ RES” direction and release it.Dynamic laser cruise control will be re-stored. If the setting operation cannot beperformed or if the warning code still ap-pears even after the weather clears, thesystem might have malfunctioned. Al-though there is no problem to continuedriving, please contact your Toyota dealer.


207


If “E3” appears on the display, a systemmalfunction has been detected.

If this code appears, stop your vehicle ina safe place, turn the ignition off, andthen restart it to reset the system. If thesetting still cannot be made or the samecode appears again, the system mighthave malfunctioned. Although there is noproblem to continue driving, please con-tact your Toyota dealer.

This mode allows you to cruise at adesired speed over about 45 km/h (28mph) with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� In the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, the approachwarning does not activate and noalarm will sound even if you aretoo close to the vehicle ahead, asneither the presence of the vehicleahead nor the vehicle−to−vehicledistance is detected. Pay specialattention to the distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead.Always confirm the setting in thedisplay.

� Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) mode in the following condi-tions, or serious injury or deathcould result:

To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use conven-tional cruise control mode when us-ing dynamic laser cruise controlwhile driving in heavy or varyingtraffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy orsnow−covered) or winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increasingwhen driving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thepreset speed in the conventionalcruise control mode, cancel theconventional cruise control modeand then downshift the transmis-sion to use engine braking to slowdown.

—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode


208



To operate conventional cruise controlmode, press the “ON−OFF” button. Thisturns the system on. The “CRUISE” and“READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster comes on. Push the lever in the“MODE” direction for longer than 1 secondto change to conventional cruise controlmode. The indicator in the instrumentcluster is as shown. You can now setyour desired cruising speed. Pressing the“ON−OFF” button again will turn the sys-tem completely off.

However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode activates and is used,it cannot be changed to the conventionalcruise control mode using the above op-eration. To change the mode, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on. Nextpush the lever in the “MODE” direction forlonger than about 1 second.

To change to the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode from the conventionalcruise control mode, push the lever in the“MODE” direction for longer than about 1second.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruisecontrol, keep the “ON−OFF” buttonoff when not using dynamic lasercruise control.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed in theconventional cruise control mode.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed and the display shows thepreset speed. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe speed set prior to acceleration.


209


You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates thewarning code “E3”. If this code appearson the display, see “CONVENTIONALCRUISE CONTROL MODE FAILUREWARNING” on page 210.


You can cancel the preset speed by doingany of the following:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.

In the following cases, the preset speedautomatically cancels out:

a. The vehicle speed falls below about40km/h (25 mph).

b. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the pre-set speed will also automatically becancelled.

c. The slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds. (This occurs when thevehicle is about to skid.)

If cancelled by a. or b., the preset speeddata is cleared and you must set thespeed from the beginning.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above reasons, donot operate the cruise control. Although itis no problem to continue driving, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.


Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.



Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever down in the “− SET”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.


Even if you downshift from “D” to “4” inthe conventional cruise control mode, en-gine braking will not be enabled becausethis mode is not cancelled. To decreasethe vehicle’s speed, reset to a slowerspeed with the cruise control lever or de-press the brake pedal. If you use thebrake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.


210



If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe lever, by depressing the brake pedalor by activating the vehicle stability con-trol system, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CONVENTIONAL CRUISE CONTROLMODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble in the conventionalcruise control mode, the “CRUISE” indica-tor light in the instrument cluster flashes,the master warning light comes on andthe alarm sounds, the warning code “E3”will appear on the display.

If a system malfunction is detected whenthe conventional cruise control mode is inthe ready mode or operating, the masterwarning light comes on, an alarm soundsand the above code appears.

If this code appears, press the “ON−OFF”button to turn the system off and thenpush it again to turn it on. If the settingstill cannot be made or the same codeappears again, the system might havemalfunctioned. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.


211


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSCar audio systemReference 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat audio system 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio/video system operating hints 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 7


212


Type 1−1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact discchanger controller)

Type 1−2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact discchanger controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player with changer

Reference


213


This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” to turn on that function withoutpushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-sette or compact disc player, a cassetteor compact disc must be loaded in theplayer.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If the another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” if the system is already on butyou want to switch from one function toanother.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has the mast type antenna oron−glass antenna printed on the inside ofthe rear quarter window.

Mast type antenna—To remove an anten-na, carefully turn it counterclockwise.

NOTICE

� Mast type antenna:To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed beforedriving your Toyota through an au-tomatic car wash.

� On−glass antenna:Attaching the film (especially con-ductive or metallic type) on the rearglass will noticeably reduce thesensitivity of the radio.

Using your audio system——Some basics


214


YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type1−1 and 1−2)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The player will play from track1 through the end of the disc. Then it willplay from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. (The player will auto-matically eject a disc if the label side isdown.) This compact disc player can storeup to six discs. The player will play fromtrack 1 through the end of the disc. Thenit will play from track 1 of the next disc.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc auto changer. In-sert only one compact disc into slotat a time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.


215


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1−1


216



�Type 1−2


217


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The button numberwill appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The button num-ber and station frequency will appear onthe display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast−forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

Type 1−1—

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.


218


BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

Type 1−2—


MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.




SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or “SUR-ROUND OFF” will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.


219


FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.


220


To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “�” or “�” side of the“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. Theradio will tune in the next preset stationup or down the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. The radio will findthe next station up or down the stationband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenscan again to the next station. To stopscanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upor down all the tracks on the disc you arelistening to. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the player scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changercan be scanned up only.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push “�” side of the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upthe first track of the next disc. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the discs, it willstop scanning.

SEEK·TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, theplayer automatically reverses sides andresumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the down side of the button onetime.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button.


221


ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.

TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


222



�Type 2


223


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttonswhen you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM andRDS stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FMTYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but-ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).


(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast−forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.


224


Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.


MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.




SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or “SUR-ROUND OFF” will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.


The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.


“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.


� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen to appears on the display.


225


Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.This system allows you to set twelve FMand six RDS stations, three for each ofthe preset button. If the RDS is off orRDS stations are not preset to the presetbuttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on thedisplay.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on). When theindicators on both sides of the slot turngreen, insert the first compact disc. Afterthe disc is loaded, the shutter of the slotwill close. After a few seconds, the shut-ter will automatically open again and theindicators will turn green so the next disccan be inserted. The same process canbe applied for loading the rest of thediscs. If the player is full of discs, “DISCFULL” will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.


226


RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with RadioData System (RDS). RDS station providinggood reception is automatically selected ifcurrent reception worsens.

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on andoff. This button is operational except inAM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold thisbutton until you hear a beep and “RDS”will appear on the display. At this time,the radio starts to search the RDS sta-tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on thedisplay.

Quickly push and release this button whenthe RDS turns on, the radio starts tosearch the RDS stations and “RDSSEARCH” will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found,“FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-tions will appear on the display, and youwill hear two beeps. The stations will bepreset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, “NORDS ST” will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep, and the displayreturns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button untilyou hear a beep again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “�” or “�” side of the“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. Theradio will tune in the next preset stationup or down the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. The radio will findthe next station up or down the stationband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenscan again to the next station. To stopscanning, push this button again.


227


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upor down all the tracks on the disc you arelistening to. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the player scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer ofseparate unit can be scanned up only.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push “�” or “�” side of the “SCAN” but-ton until you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” willappear on the display and the player willscan up or down the first track of thenext disc. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the auto changer hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

The discs in the compact disc changer ofseparate unit can be scanned up only.

SEEK·TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.

Cassette Player



A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player


Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the down side of the button onetime.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.


228


TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDSmode.

When an RDS radio station transmits atext message, “TEXT” will be displayed. Atthis time, push the “TEXT” button to viewthe text message. The message displaywill be canceled if any button that affectsthe display is pushed. To view the mes-sage again, push this button again. Afterthe entire message has been displayed,the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory tostore three 64−character messages. Tostore a message in memory, push andhold the “TEXT” button until you hear abeep.

If three messages are already stored inmemory, the oldest message will be over-written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis-play the most recent message. Each pushof the button will display messages in theorder of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or ifthere are no more messages to be re-called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on thedisplay, and the message display will becanceled.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will start seeking any traffic programstation.

When a traffic program station is found,“TRAF” will be displayed and you will heara beep.

After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display for afew seconds and the display returns tothe previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


229


TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button whilereceiving an RDS station, the current pro-gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro-gram type changes as in the following:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� ALERT (Emergency message)


230


Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)


231


1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-ume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “−” to decrease the volume. Thevolume continues to decrease while theswitch is being pushed.

2. “��” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release from theswitch, the radio will begin seeking up ordown for a station. Do this again to findthe next station.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-tion:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switchuntil the track you want to listen to is set.If you push the switch ten times, the skipfunction will turn off. (You can skip up tonine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracksyou want to rewind, remember to countthe current track as well. For example, ifyou want to rewind to a song that is twotracks before the song you are listeningto, push the “�” side of the switch threetimes.

If you push the track switch further thanyou wanted to, push the other side of theswitch. The track number will be in-creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of thetracks remaining on the current side ofthe cassette.

� When the tape reaches to the begin-ning, the player will automatically startplaying that side.

� After the tape reaches to the end, theplayer will automatically reverse andstart playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track switchto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spoken, live,or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “�” side of the switchto fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” willappear on the display. Push and hold the“�” side of the switch to rewind a tape.“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “�” side of the switch. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, pushthe “�” side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.


232


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the switch.


Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-dio mode. Each push changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is readyto use. The DVD player will be selectableif a rear seat entertainment system isinstalled in your vehicle.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

The rear seat audio system is designedfor the rear seat passengers to enjoy theaudio sound separately between the frontseats and the rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turnedon with the rear audio system controllereven if the front audio system is off.When the front audio is turned off, therear audio system will be turned off simul-taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all themodes (AM and FM radio, cassette tapeplayer and compact disc player withchanger) with the rear seat audio systemwhen a cassette tape and a compact discare loaded in the front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems at the sametime, the system can be operated on thefront audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio systemwith commercial headphone. See “—Head-phone input jacks” on page 240 in thisSection for details.

Rear seat audio system—


233


You can also enjoy the rear seat audiosystem with a wireless headphone. Thewireless headphone can be used withinrear seat. If the signal becomes weak, theheadphone will mute. For details, refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with using the head-phone. Otherwise, you may be hardto hear the sound from the outsidewhile using the headphone and maycause an accident.

� With DVD player:

Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.


234


The rear seat audio system consists offollowing components.

1. Volume control knobs

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Headphone input jacks

4. Front audio system

5. Rear seat audio system controller

The rear seat audio system can be oper-ated with the rear seat audio system con-troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet.

—Rear seat audio systemcontroller


235


USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-troller, direct the signal output portionof the controller to the signal receptionportion of the rear seat audio systemdisplay.

The rear seat audio system controller canbe operated when the ignition switch is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures of the controller, see“CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 236in this Section.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe console box or front seat sidetable when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.

� Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as onthe instrument panel) for a longtime.


236


CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

4. “OFF” button

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 215 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button. The radio will tune in the nextpreset station up or down the band. Thestation frequency will appear on the dis-play.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button to select the other side of a cas-sette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected. (“ ” indicatesthe top side, “ ” indicates the bottomside.)



237


Compact disc player

Compact disc changer only—

Use this button to select a disc you wantto listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button until the number of the disc youwant to listen to appears on the display.

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time youpush the button, the radio will step up ordown to another frequency. If you pushand hold the button, and the radio will gointo the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up ordown for a station of the nearest frequen-cy and will stop on reception. Each timeyou push the button, the stations will besearched one after another.


This button has the following features—

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)button until “FF” will appears on the dis-play to forward a tape. Push and hold the“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW”appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, push“ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.

To skip up or down to locate a song orrecording.


Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.

Compact disc player

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track:Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton until the number of the track you wantto listen to appears on the display. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, quickly push the “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse: Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reversewithin a compact disc. When you releasethe button, the compact disc player willresume playing.


238


3. “ON/SOURCE” button

Push “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on therear seat audio system.

Use “ON/SOURCE” button to select anaudio mode when the rear seat audio sys-tem is on. Each time you push this but-ton, the system changes between the ra-dio, cassette player and compact discplayer.

When you change the mode, the displayindicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and compact discsare not loaded in the front audio system,only a radio mode can be selected in therear seat audio system.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button to se-lect the casette tape player mode or com-pact disc player mode in that case, abeep sounds from front audio system and“INVALID” flashes on the screen for 6seconds, and then the rear audio systemreturns to the radio mode.

If you push “ON/SOURCE” button whilereceiving an emergency broadcast, a beepsounds and “INVALID” appears on thescreen to indicate that no button can beoperated.

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the screen.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a trafficannouncement (TA) while the rear seataudio system is in the radio mode,“TRAF” will flash on the screen and therear seat audio system will turn off. Whenthe front audio receives a traffic an-nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will screen one of the four followingerror messages.


“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damagedor inserted incorrectly (up−side down).Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside thesystem. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

“ERR 4”: Over−current. Ask your Toyotadealer to inspect.


4. “OFF” button

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rearseat audio system.


239


REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the followingprocedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing thelock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put in a new battery with the positive(+) side up.

Put in the case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure that the positive side ofthe controller battery is facing cor-rectly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.


240


� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertionand that dust or oil does not ad-here to the transmitter case.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio sys-tem with commercial headphone.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the knob. Turn right to increase thevolume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

The recommended headphone impedanceis from 16 Ω to 32 Ω.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

—Headphone input jacks


241


The rear seat entertainment system con-sists of the following components.

1. Rear seat entertainment system display

2. Headphone input jacks

3. Headphone volume control dials

4. Front audio system

5. Power outlet main switch

6. Power outlets

7. Input terminal adapter

8. Rear seat entertainment systemcontroller

Rear seat entertainment system—


242


The rear seat entertainment system is de-signed for the rear passengers to enjoyaudio and DVD video separately from thefront audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated when the ignition key is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,compact disc player with changer andDVD player) on the rear seat entertain-ment system only if a cassette tape anda compact disc are loaded in the frontaudio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canplay DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CDtext, dts−CD or DVD audio only when adisc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound whenyour personal audio system is connectedto the input terminal adapter. For details,refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainmentsystem with commercial headphone. See“—Headphone input jacks” on page 291 inthis Section for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-tainment system with a wireless head-phone. The wireless headphone can beused within rear seat. If the signal be-comes weak, the headphone will mute.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with using the head-phone. Otherwise, you may be hardto hear the sound from the outsidewhile using the headphone and maycause an accident.

� With DVD player:

Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.


243


To open the display, push the lock releasebutton.

Push down the display until it is locked.

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with adry soft cloth. If the screen is pushedby hand or wiped with a hard cloth,the surface of the screen may bescratched.

To close, push up the display until youhear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-cally turned off when the display isclosed. However, the rear seat entertain-ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, close the display whenit is not in use.

—Display


244


NOTICE

� Benzene or alkaline solutions maydamage the coated surface of thescreen.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not turn on the rearseat entertainment system longerthan necessary when the engine isnot running.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated with the rear seat entertain-ment system controller and buttons on theDVD player unit. The system cannot beoperated by touching the switches on thescreen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet accordingto the following procedure.

—Rear seat entertainmentsystem controller


245


1. Remove the cover of the controlleras shown.

2. Remove the insulating sheet.


246


USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-tem controller, direct the signal outputportion of the controller to the signalreception portion of the rear seat enter-tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe console box or front seat sidetable when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.

� Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as onthe instrument panel) for a longtime.


247


LOCATING THE CONTROLLER

If you lose sight of the controller, pushand hold the “CURSOR (REMOTE)” buttonon the DVD player unit until you hear abeep. A buzzer sounds from the controllerto let you know where it is.

To stop the buzzer, push any button of thecontroller.

If the controller is located close to some-thing that blocks the signal, such as somekind of metal, the controller may not re-ceive the signal and the buzzer may notsound.

FCC InformationCaution: Any changes or modifica-tions in construction of this devicewhich are not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

FCC Label InformationThis device complies with part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, In-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.


248


1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-tertainment system.

4. Joy stick

This joy stick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

6. “DISC/CH/PROG” button

This button skips directly to a desiredpreset station, disc, track or chapter.

7. “��” button

This button fast forwards a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

8. “RETURN” button

This button skips to the predeterminedscene for the disc.

—Control buttons�Controller


249


9. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screenfor DVD video when the DVD player isoperated.

10. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-dio screen when the DVD player isoperated.

11. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-title screen when the DVD player isoperated.

12. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,contrast and brightness of the screen.

13. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set upscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

14. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of thescreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

15. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title searchscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

16. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selectionscreen for DVD video when the DVDplayer is operated.

17. “ ” button

This button pauses a screen when theDVD player is operated.

18. “��” button

This button reverse a screen when theDVD player is operated.

19. “�” button

This button plays a screen when theDVD player is operated.

20. “TUNE/TRACK” button

This button operates the front audiosystem or select the track/chapterwhen the DVD player is operated.

21. “CURSOR” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated.

22. “VIDEO” button

This button turns on the video modewhen your personal audio device isconnected.


250


1. “ ” button

This button ejects a disc.

2. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.


This button operates the front audiosystem or select the track/chapterwhen the DVD player is operated.


This button skips directly to a desiredpreset station, disc, track or chapter.

5. “CURSOR (REMOTE)” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated. This button alsocan be used when you lose sight ofthe controller.

6. Joy stick

This joy stick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

�Buttons on the DVD player unit


251


7. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

8. “DISC” indicator light

This light indicates that the disc isloaded.

Controller

DVD player unit

To turn on the system, push the“SOURCE” button.

The screen indicates which mode can beselected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” but-ton when the connected DVD player oryour personal audio machine is on. Therear seat entertainment system will beturned on.

The rear seat entertainment system canselect all the modes.

When a cassette tape, a compact disc, aDVD video disc, an audio CD, a videoCD, a CD text, a dts−CD or a DVD audiodisc is not loaded on the front audio sys-tem or the DVD player, only the radiomode can be selected on the rear seatentertainment system.

—Turning the rear seatentertainment system on andoff


252


To turn off the system, push the “OFF”button.

When the front audio system is turned off,the rear audio system and the DVD playerwill be turned off simultaneously.

All the modes of the front audio systemcan be operated on the rear seat enter-tainment system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems simulta-neously, the system can be operated onthe front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

Controller

DVD player unit

—Front audio systemoperation


253


SELECTING THE MODE

Use the joy stick to select the mode.Push the “ENT” button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected bythe joy stick is colored blue. When the“ENT” button is pushed, the mode displaychanges to green. If the mode display isgray, it cannot be selected.

The “Speaker sound” on the mode displayis selected on the front audio system.

Cassette tape player and compact discplayer

Radio


254


When you select a mode, the screen indi-cates which is selected.

Radio

AM mode:

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the screen.

FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the screen.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

Controller

DVD player unit

OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM

To operate the front audio system, usethe following switches.


Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 215 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “DISC/CH/PROG” button. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up or down theband. The station frequency will appear onthe screen.


255



Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “DISC/CH/PROG” button to select the other sideof a cassette tape. The screen indicateswhich side is currently selected. (“ ” indi-cates the top side, “ ” indicates the bot-tom side.)



Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button. Eachtime you push the button, the radio willstep up or down to another frequency. Ifyou push and hold the button, and theradio will go into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE/TRACK” button. The radio will seekup or down for a station of the nearestfrequency and will stop on reception. Eachtime you push the button, the stations willbe searched one after another.


To fast forward a cassette tape, push andhold the “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK”button until “FF” appears on the screen.Push and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button until “REW” appears onthe screen to rewind a tape.



Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the screen.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the screen reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.


256


Compact disc player


Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thescreen. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push the“ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button onetime.

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE/TRACK” button to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AAA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto local regulations.

Replace the battery according to the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller asshown.


257


2. Remove the discharged batteries andput in the new batteries as shown.Install the cover.

NOTICE

� Be sure that the positive side andnegative side of the controller bat-tery should be faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertion.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

The DVD player can play audio CDs,DVD video discs, CD texts, dts−CDsand video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see“Car audio/video system operating hints”on page 292 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc mustbe loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the three followingerror messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,damaged or it was inserted upside down.Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen: It indicates that the DVD re-gion code is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on thescreen: There is a problem inside theplayer. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.


—DVD player


258


INSERTING THE DISC

Insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while thedisc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannotbe played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,“DISC CHECK” will also appear on thescreen. For appropriate discs for this play-er, see “Car audio/video system operatinghints” on page 292 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,and it will play from the beginning of thetrack or chapter again after it reaches theend.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the DVD player. Do not insertanything other than a disc into theslot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player does not needan adaptor to play compact disc singles.Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3in.) in diameter−smaller than standarddiscs.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compactdisc singles—it could cause trackingerrors or interfere with the ejection ofcompact discs.


259


EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.

To select the DVD mode, push the“DVD” button on the controller.

You can also select the DVD mode on themode selection screen mentioned above.

—Selecting the DVD mode


260


The “DVD Hint!” screen appears whenthe DVD mode is first selected afteryou turn the ignition key to the “ACC”or “ON” position.

Push the “OK” switch when you read themessage.

The DVD player can be operated with thecontroller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “RETURN” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SET UP” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “ ”, “�”, “��” and “��” buttons

Controller

DVD player unit

—DVD player operationswitches


261


The player can also be operated with theswitches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,select the switch by the joy stick andpush the “ENT” button. You cannot selectthe switches on the screen by touchingthem directly.

When the switch is selected by the joystick, the outline of the switch changes toblue. Push the “ENT” button, and theswitch will be highlighted in green.

Controller

DVD player unit

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHESON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, pushthe “CURSOR” button on the controller.


262


Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operationswitch)

Top page (DVD audio operation switch)

Second page (DVD audio operationswitch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)


263


There are operation switches on the “TopPage” and “Second Page” screens.

To change the screen, push the “TopPage” or “Second Page” switch on thescreen.

If “ ” appears on the screen whenyou select a switch, it indicates thatthe switch cannot work.

On the screen

Controller


264


DVD player unit

To turn off the switches on the screen,push the “CURSOR” button on the control-ler once again or push the “Hide Keys” onthe screen.

NOTE: The playback condition of someDVD video discs may be determined bythe DVD video software producer. ThisDVD player plays discs as the softwareproducer intended. Therefore, somefunctions may not work properly. Besure to read the instruction manual forthe DVD video disc separately provided.For detailed information about DVD vid-eo discs, see “—DVD video disc infor-mation” on page 287 in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, DVDaudio, video CD or audio tracks may notrecord in some cases while the menu isdisplayed. As audio will not play in thiscase, verify that the video tracks are play-ing and then activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while playingback certain DVD video discs.

—DVD player operation (DVD video/DVD audio)


265


CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDsis recorded at a low volume to em-phasize the impact of sound effects.If you adjust the volume assumingthat the conversations represent themaximum volume level available forthe DVD, you may be startled bylouder sound effects or when youchange to a different audio source.Loud sounds may have a significantimpact on the human body or pose adriving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THEDISC ON OR OFF

DVD video—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switchon the screen. You can also turn on themenu screen by pushing the “MENU” or“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.

DVD audio—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” switch on thescreen. You can also turn on the menuscreen by pushing the “TOP MENU”switch on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe separate manual for the DVD disc.


266


To turn on the selecting switch, push the“ ” switch.

To select the menu for the disc, push the“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on thescreen. Push the “Enter” switch to selectthe menu for the disc.

You can also select the menu for the discby the joy stick and the “ENT” button onthe controller when the control switchesare not indicated on the screen.

Push the “Shift Keys” on the screen, andthe switches (“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “Enter”and “Shift Keys” switches) will move upand down.

To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”switch on the screen. To turn on theswitch again, push the “ON” switch on thescreen.

To return to the previous screen, push the“Back” switch on the screen.


267


OPERATING THE “ ”, “�”, “��” AND“��” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto pause the disc.

“�” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto cancel the pause and return to normalplaying.

“��” and “��” switches/buttons: Pushand hold the “��” or “��” switch/buttonto fast forward or reverse. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, release the switch/button.

DVD video only—

Push the “��” or “��” switch/buttonwhile pausing, the DVD video plays theslow−motion video replay or the slow−mo-tion video replay in reverse.


268


SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINEDSCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, pushthe “Return” switch. The DVD player startsplaying from the beginning of the predeter-mined screen. You can also display thescreen by pushing the “RETURN” buttonon the controller.

For further details of the predeterminedscreen, see the separate manual for theDVD disc.

SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

To display the searching title (DVD video)or group (DVD audio) screen, push the“Search” switch on the screen. You canalso display the screen by pushing the“SEARCH” button on the controller.


269


DVD video

DVD audio

DVD video—

Select the title number by using the “−”,“+” and “+10” switches and push the“Enter” switch to enter the number. Theplayer starts playing disc for that titlenumber. The selected title number willappear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

DVD audio—

Enter the group number by using the “−”and “+” switches. The selected groupnumber will appear on the screen. Pushthe “Enter” switch. The player starts play-ing the disc from the entered group num-ber.

Push the “Back” switch to return to theprevious screen.

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only—

Enter the bonus group number on thesearching group screen and push the“Enter” switch. The “Enter Key Code”screen will appear. To enter the number ofthe group you want to play, push thegroup number. If you enter the wrongnumber, push the “Clear” switch to deletethe number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.The player starts playing the disc from theselected bonus group number.


270


CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switchon the screen to forward or reverse thestill pictures.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,and then the changing subtitle languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”button on the controller.


271


Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”switch.


The selected subtitle language will appearon the screen.

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio” switch on the screenand then the changing audio languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “AUDIO” buttonon the controller.


272


DVD video

DVD audio

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

To turn off the audio language screen,push the “Hide” switch.


DVD video—

The selected audio language will appearon the screen.

DVD audio—

The sound condition which is playing atpresent will appear on the screen.


273


CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,and then the changing angle screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “ANGLE” button on thecontroller.

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when the“ ” mark appears on the screen. Eachtime you push the “Angle” switch, theangle changes. The angle number whichyou can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide”switch.



274


CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,and then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Setup Menu 1 screen

Setup Menu 2 screen

There are initial setting switches on the“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”screens.

To change the screen, push the “TopPage” or “Second Page” switch on thescreen.

After you change the initial setting, pushthe “Enter” switch. The initial settingswitch will be turned off and return to thepicture previously.

When the “Initial Setting” switch on “SetupMenu 2” is pushed, all menus are initial-ized.


275


CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Lang.” switch on the“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select AudioLanguage” screens appear.

Select the language you want to hear onthe screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want tohear, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterAudio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to hear, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

If numbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to hearagain.

To return to the “Select Audio Language”screen, push the “Back” switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,push the “Subtitle Lang.” switch on the“Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterSubtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.


276


To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “DVD Language” switchon the “Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.

If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterDVD Language Code” screen will appear.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterDVD Language Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.


277


TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OROFF

The angle mark can be turned on fordiscs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”switch on the screen, the angle markturns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWERRESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen bysetting the viewer restrictions. You canprevent the restriction with a password.Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, pushthe “Parental” switch on the “Setup Menu1” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”screen will appear.

Push the number for the password andthe “Enter” switch. The “Select RestrictionLevel” screen will appear.

If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

You cannot change the setting without in-putting the password. When you forget orchange the password, push the “Clear”switch ten times to initialize the password.



278


Push a parental level (1—8). The smallerthe level number, the stricter the age limit.Push the “Back” switch to return to the“Setup Menu 1” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Each time you push the “Display Mode”switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, thedisplay mode is changed from wide modeto auto mode.

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese


279


0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay


280


1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu


281


SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the “ ”or “ ” side of the (TUNE/TRACK) buttonon the controller until the number of thechapter/track you want to select appearson the screen.

DVD video

DVD audio

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. To stop scanning, pushthis switch again. If the player scannedall the tracks on the disc, it will stopscanning.


282


5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switchto fast forward or reverse a disc. Whenyou release the switch, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER(video CD only)

Push the “Sel. Number” switch and thenthe disc menu number search screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “SEARCH” switch on thecontroller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the“−”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the“Enter” switch. The player starts playingthe disc from the entered disc menu num-ber. The entered disc menu number willappear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

Move up and down the switches by push-ing the “Shift keys” on the screen.

—DVD player operation (videoCD/audio CD/CD text)


283


OPERATING THE “ ”, “�”, “��” AND“��” SWITCHES (video CD only)

“ ” switch: Push this switch to pause thedisc.

“�” switch: Push this switch to cancel thepause and return to normal playing.

“��” and “��” switches: Push thisswitch to fast forward or reverse. If youwant to return to the beginning of thecurrent track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the “��” switch/button while paus-ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motionvideo replay.

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (videoCD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on themenu screen for the disc. You can alsoturn on the menu screen by pushing the“RETURN” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK(video CD only)

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. MenuPrev.” switch while the disc menu is dis-played. The next or previous page willappear on the screen.

Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. MenuPrev.” switch while the player is playingvideo. The next or previous track will besearched and played.


284


CHANGING A MULTIPLEXTRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change amultiplex transmission. The mode changesfrom Main/Sub to Main to Sub and backto Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (videoCD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screenand then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”on page 274 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Video CD

Audio CD


285


CD Text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear onthe screen when pushing the “DVD” but-ton.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc. Tostop scanning, push this switch again.When the player has scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push the “ ” or “ ” switch to fastforward or reverse the disc. When youpush the switch again, the DVD playerwill resume playing.


286


You can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the control-ler and then the “Display” screen will ap-pear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect thesunlight. This is not a malfunction.

Each time you push the “+” or “−” switch,you can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

+ or RED− orGREEN

COLORStrengthensthe redcolor

Strengthensthe greencolor

CONTRASTStrengthensthe contrast

Weakensthe contrast

TONEStrengthensthe tone

Weakensthe tone

BRIGHTNESS Brightens Darkens

After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”switch to return to the previous screen.

—Screen adjustment


287


The audio machine connected to the inputterminal adapter can be played in thevideo mode.

To select the video mode, push the“VIDEO” button on the controller. You canalso select the video mode on the modeselection screen mentioned above.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-or TV formats. DVD video discs con-forming to other formats such as PALor SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discshave a region code indicating where youcan use. If the DVD video disc is notlabeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it inthis DVD player. If you attempt to play aninappropriate DVD video disc in this play-er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen. Even if the DVD video discdoes not have a region code, in somecases you cannot use it.

—Selecting the video mode —DVD video disc information


288


Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC formatof color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screento be selected. Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions inwhich this video disccan be played.ALL: all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discthat holds video. DVD video discs haveadopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-dards of digital compression technologies.The picture data is compressed by 1/40on average and stored. Variable rate en-coded technology in which the volume ofdata assigned to the picture is changeddepending on the picture format has alsobeen adopted. Audio data is stored usingPCM and Dolby digital, which enableshigher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-ti−angle and multi−language features willalso help you enjoy the more advancedtechnology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limitswhat can be viewed in conformity with thelevel of restrictions of the country. Thelevel of restrictions varies depending onthe DVD video disc. Some DVD videodiscs cannot be played at all, or violentscenes are skipped or replaced with otherscenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for childrenand G−rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs canbe played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can selectthe language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are providedon DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the sameregion code as the DVD player, you can-not play the disc on the DVD player. Forregion codes, see page 287.

Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audioformat DVD. Other decoded type cannotbe played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored on DVD video discs are di-vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video andaudio programs stored on DVD videodiscs. Usually, one piece of a movie, onealbum, or one audio program is assignedas a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A titlecomprises plural chapters.


289


Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, andthe double−D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-lished works.�1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protectedby method claims of certain U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual propertyrights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other rights owners. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision Cor-poration, and is intended for home andother limited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized by MacrovisionCorporation. Reverse engineering ordisassembly is prohibited.

“DTS” is a trademark of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid-eos and sound when your audio systemis connected to the input terminal adapter.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

To use the input terminal adapter, openthe cover.

The input terminal adapter is composed of3 input terminal adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapterRed: Audio input adapterWhite: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the input terminal adapter coverwhen the input terminal adapter is notin use. Inserting a foreign object oth-er than the appropriate plug that fitsthe adapter may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuit.

—Input terminal adapter


290


This power outlet is designed for use asa power supply for the audio device con-nected to the input terminal adapter.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinga foreign object other than the ap-propriate plug that fits the outletmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuit.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances even iftheir power consumption is under 115VAC/100W. These appliances may notoperate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

—Power outlet


291


� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-ment system with commercial head-phones.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.


To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the dial.

Left side dial: Turn it upward to increasethe volume, turn it downward to decreasethe volume.

Right side dial: Turn it downward to in-crease the volume, turn it upward to de-crease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

The recommended headphone impedanceis from 16 Ω to 32 Ω.


—Headphone input jacks


292


CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� Do not put anything other than aDVD video, DVD audio, video CD,dts−CD and audio CD into the DVDplayer.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Car audio/video systemoperating hints


293


Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

� Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player and DVDplayer from working. On hot days, usethe air conditioning to cool the vehicleinterior before you use the players.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player andDVD player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer and DVD player, the playersmay not play even though they appearto be working. Remove the disc fromthe player and wait until it dries.


294


CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-ers use an invisible laser beam whichcould cause hazardous radiation ex-posure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the players correctly.

Compact disc player

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

SACDdts−CDCopy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

DVD audiodiscs

Video CDs


295


DVD player

� Use only discs marked as shownabove. The following products may notbe playable on your DVD player.

SACDCopy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROMDVD−RDVD+RDVD+RWDVD−RWDVD−ROMDVD−RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs


296


NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player or changer, orit may be impossible to eject thedisc.

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.


297


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemFront manual air conditioning system

Controls 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front automatic air conditioning systemControls 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear manual air conditioning system

Controls 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear automatic air conditioning systemControls 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 8


298


1. “A/C” button

2. Air intake selector

3. Air flow selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Fan speed selector

Front manual air conditioning system——Controls


299


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” on page301.


300


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.


301


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips


302


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging

—The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to thewindshield or floor/windshield position, theair intake selects FRESH automatically.This is to clean up the front view morequickly.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.


303


Defrosting

—The outside of the windshield



(red zone)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to thewindshield or floor/windshield position, theair intake selects FRESH automatically.This is to clean up the front view morequickly.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating. This setting clears the front viewmore quickly.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.


304


1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “SYNC” button indicatoron—simultaneous setting on driver,front passenger and rear passengersides)(with “SYNC” button indicatoroff—individual setting on driver sideonly)

2. Temperature selector (“PASS TEMP”)(individual setting on front passengerside only)

3. “A/C” button

4. “SYNC” button(with button indicator on—simultaneoustemperature setting )(with button indicator off—individualtemperature setting)

5. “MODE” button (air flow selector)

6. Windshield air flow button

7. Temperature selector (“REAR TEMP”)(individual setting on rear passengerside only)

8. Fan speed selector

9. Air intake selector

10. “OFF” button

11. “AUTO” button

Front automatic air conditioning system——Controls


305


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you adjust the temperature selectorbutton to maximum cooling, “LO” will ap-pear on the display and the air intakemode will be automatically changed to RE-CIRCULATE.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Push the “ ” (increase) or “ ” (de-crease) side of the button to adjust thefan speed.

In the automatic operation mode, the fanspeed is adjusted automatically unless youdesire another fan speed mode.

“SYNC” button

Push the button to change the mode ofthe temperature setting.

With the indicator on—Simultaneous tem-perature settingWith the indicator off—Individual temper-ature setting

With the indicator on, the rear air condi-tioning is turned on. However, controls onthe rear control panel cannot be used. Tocancel this function, push the “SYNC” but-ton.

For details about the rear air conditioning,see “Rear automatic air conditioning sys-tem” on page 312 in this Section.

Temperature selectors

To increase the temperature, press the“ ” side. To decrease it, press the “ ”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

—“TEMP” button

With the “SYNC” button indicator on—This button changes the temperature onthe driver side, front passenger side andrear passenger side simultaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the“PASS TEMP” or “REAR TEMP” button ispushed.

With the “SYNC” button indicatoroff—This button changes the temperatureon the driver side only.

—“PASS TEMP” button

This button changes the temperature onthe front passenger side only.

—“REAR TEMP” button

This button changes the temperature onthe rear passenger side only when therear air conditioning is turned on.

For details about the rear air conditioning,see “Rear automatic air conditioning sys-tem” on page 312 in this Section.

The temperature display changes between“�C” and “�F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi−information display” onpage 316 in Section 1−9.)

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.


306


“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In the automatic operation mode, the airflow mode is selected automatically amongPanel, Bi−level, Floor and Floor/Windshieldunless you desire another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to selectFRESH automatically. This is to clean upthe front view more quickly.


For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” on page307.

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.


307


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed selec-tor to adjust the fan speed high for aminute to help clear the intake ductsof snow or moisture. This can reducethe amount of fogging on the windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips


308


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperature

MANUAL OPERATION


Heating

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF


309


OPERATION FOR DEFOGGING

The inside of the windshield


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

OPERATION FOR DEFROSTING

The outside of the windshield


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards high temperatureAir flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating. This setting clears the front viewmore quickly.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.

Side vents


310


1. Fan speed selector (rear)

2. Air flow selectors

3. Temperature selector

4. Fan speed selector (front)

Rear manual air conditioning system——Controls


311


Fan speed selector (front)

This selector knob is used to turn the rearair conditioning system on/off and adjustthe fan speed.

In the “REAR” position, you can operatethe system by the rear controllers.


Turning the knob to the “OFF” positionturns the system off and it cannot beoperated by the rear controllers.

Fan speed selector (rear)

When the front fan speed selector is inthe “REAR” position, you can operate therear fan speed selector.


Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-ture—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

Air flow selectors

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the roof panelvents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the roofpanel vents and floor vent.

3. Floor—Air flows from the floor vent.

—Air flow selector settings


312


1. “AUTO” button

2. Air flow selectors

3. Temperature selector (rear)

4. Fan speed selectors

5. “OFF” button

6. “REAR” button

7. Temperature selector (front)

Rear automatic air conditioning system——Controls


313


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the rear airconditioning, press the “AUTO” button. Anindicator light will illuminate to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed and air flow according to the tem-perature.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selectors

Push the button to select the fan speedmode.

In the automatic operation mode, the fanspeed is adjusted automatically unless youdesire another fan speed mode.

Temperature selectorsTo increase the temperature, press the“�” side. To decrease it, press the “�”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

When “SYNC” appears on the rear tem-perature display, rear controls cannot beused. Use the controls on the front controlpanel. To cancel this function, push the“SYNC” button. For details about the“SYNC” button, see “Front automatic airconditioning system” on page 304 in thisSection.

The temperature display changes between“�C” and “�F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature display is changed. (For de-tails, see “Multi−information display” onpage 316 in Section 1−9.)

“REAR” buttonTo turn on the rear air conditioning systemusing the front control panel, push thebutton. To turn it off, push the buttonagain.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the rear airconditioning system.

Air flow selectors

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the roof panelvents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the roofpanel vents and floor vent.

3. Floor—Air flows from the floor vent.


314


—Air flow selector settings


315


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentMulti−information display 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversation mirror 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toyota park assist system 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener box 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage box 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removable console box 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note pad holder 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seat side table 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coat hooks 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun shade 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9


316


1. “E/M” button

2. Garage door opener buttons

3. “MODE” button

4. Garage door opener indicator

5. Outside temperature and cruiseinformation display

6. Compass

Multi−information display—


317


Operate the multi−information displaywith the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

—Before using themulti−information display

Indication

English/U.S.CustomarySystem (E)

Metric (M)

Outsidetemperature

�F

�C

Instantaneous fuel consumption/Average fuel consumption

MPG

L/100 km

Distance to empty

MI

km

“E/M” button

This button is used to switch between English/U.S. Customary System andmetric units.

Each time you push this button, the display switches. This is also linked to the frontand rear air conditioning displays. The display variations are as follows;


318


“MODE” button

This button is used to select the item.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Outside tempera-ture and cruise information display” onpage 321.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink� and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink�

The HomeLink� in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

—Garage door opener


319


1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program. Push and holddown one of the buttons until the indi-cator corresponding to the selectedchannel begins to flash.

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink�” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.


320


Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink�

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.


321


CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of theIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including in-terference that may cause undesired op-eration.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andIndustry Canada DOC/MPAC rules.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the device.

—Outside temperature andcruise information display


322


The outside temperature and cruise in-formation display indicates the follow-ing information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

4. Distance to empty

5. Display off (no compass)

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles through this informa-tion.

During the off mode, the compass displayis also turned off.

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

To set the unit, push the “E/M” buttonuntil the desired unit display appears. (Atthis time, front and rear air conditioningdisplays also change.)

1. Outside temperature

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If there is some abnormality in the con-nection of the outside air temperature sen-sor, “−−�C” (“−−�F”) will appear on thedisplay. If “−−�C” (“−−�F”) appears on thedisplay, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−�C” (“−−�F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 1seconds.

To reset the calculations, return the modeto “AVG” and push and hold the “MODE”and “E/M” button simultaneously for 2 sec-onds.

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption (“INST”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated and displayed based on dis-tance and fuel consumption for 1 sec-onds with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 2seconds.

Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in the following cases.

� When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running, the display will indicatethe extremely high fuel consumption.

� When the vehicle is driving down along slope, applying the engine brake,the display will indicate the extremelylow fuel consumption.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

4. Distance to empty(“DTE”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.


323


Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger. If fuel consumption is poor, thedriving range will be shorter.

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading south.

The direction display is updated every 2seconds.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe roof.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

—Compass


324


If the direction is not indicated or thesystem does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the roof ofthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the roof of the vehicle.Doing this may cause malfunction ofthe compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 321.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 5 sec-onds until the “VAR” indication appearson the compass display.

3. Push the “E/M” button several timesuntil the desired zone number appearson the compass display.

If the button is not pushed for 10 sec-onds, the display returns to the compass/outside temperature mode and the numberthat is last set is memorized.

To select the zone where the vehicle iscurrently located, refer to the followingmap.


325


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5Guam: 8Saipan: 8


326


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Inthis case, the compass needs to be cali-brated.

To calibrate the compass manually, do thefollowing;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place andswitch the display to the outside tem-perature. (To switch to this mode, see“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation display” on page 321.)

2. Push and hold both the “MODE” and“E/M” buttons simultaneously for 10seconds until the “CAL” indication ap-pears on the compass display. (At thistime, the compass display is locked in“N”.)

3. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h(5 mph) or less. If there is not enoughspace to drive in a circle, drive aroundthe block.

When the “CAL” indication goes off andthe compass returns to the normal mode,calibration is complete.

If you want to restart the calibration be-fore it is complete, push both of the“MODE” and “E/M” buttons simultaneouslyfor 10 seconds again.


327


Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

With manual air conditioning system

With automatic air conditioning system

Clock


328


To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.


If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication will be reduced.

The conversation mirror is designed forthe driver and front passenger to beable to look at the rear passengerswithout turning around.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe mirror only when the vehicle isstopped.

To use the mirror, push it down.

Conversation mirror


329


The mirror angle can be adjusted by push-ing its edge.

1: Rear sensors2: Rear corner sensors3: Front corner sensors

The Toyota park assist system is de-signed to inform you of the approxi-mate distance between your vehicle andan obstruction by indicator and buzzerwhile driving at approximate 10 km/h (6mph) or less when parking the vehicle.This system uses sensors to detect ob-structions.

This system works when the ignition keyis at the “ON” position and the transmis-sion is not in the “P” position.

� Rear and rear corner sensors workonly when the transmission is in the“R” position.

� When the vehicle is forwarding, thefront corner sensors work.

Toyota park assist system(type A)


330


To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzerwill sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

In the following cases, the buzzer willsound several times and the indicatorwill stay on to indicate that the systemis not working properly.

� When the temperature is extremely low.

� When any of the sensors are malfunc-tion.

If the indicator is continuously on, haveyour Toyota dealer check the system.

If the indicator remains blinking butyou do not hear the buzzer sound,clean the sensors with soft cloth.

Rear sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors


331


This system is designed to inform you ofthe approximate distance between yourvehicle and an obstacle by indicator andbuzzer.

Rear sensors

Distance shown as A inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 1800—900(70.9—35.4)

Intermittent

Approximately 900—550 (35.4—21.7)

Fastintermittent

Approximately 550 (21.7) or less

Continuous

Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as B inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 850—520 (33.5—20.5)

Intermittent

Approximately 520—250 (20.5—9.8)

Fastintermittent


Continuous

Front corner sensors

Distance shown as C inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 600—400 (23.6—15.7)

Intermittent


Fastintermittent


Continuous

1: Front sensors2: Rear corner sensors3: Rear sensors


332


Perceptible area

A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.)C: Approximately 600 mm (23.6 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown inthe previous illustration. Check the areaaround the vehicle before driving and startdriving slowly.

CAUTION

� The Toyota park assist system isintended as an aid to assist you topark and is not a substitute foryour personal judgment. Make yourdriving decisions based on your ob-servations.

� Do not attach accessories or otherobjects to the vehicle within thesensor perceptible area. Doing somay cause the system to malfunc-tion, which might result in an acci-dent.

� In certain situations, the systemwill not function properly and whenthe vehicle approaches certain ob-jects, the system will not detectthose objects. Therefore, always ob-serve the area around the vehicleand do not rely solely on the sys-tem.


This ISM device compiles with Cana-dian ICES−001.


333


In the following cases, the system maynot work properly.

� When ice, snow, mud or other objectsbuild up on the sensor.

� When the vehicle is parked in extreme-ly high or extremely low temperaturefor a long period.

� When driving on bumpy or graveledroads or on grass

� When a device such as a horn fromanother vehicle, motorcycle engine, oran air brake sound from a heavy−dutyvehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, nearyour vehicle

� When attaching a two−way radio anten-na

� When rain or water splashes on thesensor.

� When operating the vehicle on an in-clined surface

� When a radio antenna or fender poleis mounted on your vehicle.

� When a towing hitch is mounted onyour vehicle.

The system may not detect the follow-ing.

� Thin objects such as a wire or rope

� Objects with a surface area too smallto reflect ultrasonic waves such aswire gauze

� Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-rial such as cotton or snow

� A person near the vehicle (dependingon the type of clothes worn)

� Objects with a sharp edge

� Small or short objects

� Tall objects with an upper part project-ing toward the vehicle

� Objects just under the bumper

� Objects very close to your vehicle

In the following cases, have yourToyota dealer check the system.

� When the bumper is damaged.

� When the indicator is continuously on.

1: Rear sensors2: Rear corner sensors

The Toyota park assist system is de-signed to inform you of the approxi-mate distance between your vehicle andan obstruction by indicator and buzzerwhile driving at approximate 10 km/h (6mph) or less when parking the vehicle.This system uses sensors to detect ob-structions.

This system works when the ignition keyis at the “ON” position and the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

The sensors work only when the transmis-sion is in the “R” position.

Toyota park assist system(type B)


334


To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzerwill sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

In the following cases, the buzzer willsound several times and the indicatorwill stay on to indicate that the systemis not working properly.

� When the temperature is extremely low.

� When any of the sensors are malfunc-tion.

If the indicator is continuously on, haveyour Toyota dealer check the system.

If the indicator remains blinking butyou do not hear the buzzer sound,clean the sensors with soft cloth.

Rear sensors

Rear corner sensors


335


This system is designed to inform you ofthe approximate distance between yourvehicle and an obstacle by indicator andbuzzer.

Rear sensors

Distance shown as A inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 1800—900(70.9—35.4)

Intermittent

Approximately 900—550 (35.4—21.7)

Fastintermittent


Continuous

Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as B inmm (in.)

Indicator andbuzzer

Approximately 850—520 (33.5—20.5)

Intermittent


Fastintermittent


Continuous

1: Rear corner sensors2: Rear sensors

Perceptible area

A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown inthe previous illustration. Check the areaaround the vehicle before driving and startdriving slowly.


336


CAUTION

� The Toyota park assist system isintended as an aid to assist you topark and is not a substitute foryour personal judgment. Make yourdriving decisions based on your ob-servations.

� Do not attach accessories or otherobjects to the vehicle within thesensor perceptible area. Doing somay cause the system to malfunc-tion, which might result in an acci-dent.

� In certain situations, the systemwill not function properly and whenthe vehicle approaches certain ob-jects, the system will not detectthose objects. Therefore, always ob-serve the area around the vehicleand do not rely solely on the sys-tem.


This ISM device compiles with Cana-dian ICES−001.

In the following cases, the system maynot work properly.

� When ice, snow, mud or other objectsbuild up on the sensor.

� When the vehicle is parked in extreme-ly high or extremely low temperaturefor a long period.

� When driving on bumpy or graveledroads or on grass

� When a device such as a horn fromanother vehicle, motorcycle engine, oran air brake sound from a heavy−dutyvehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, nearyour vehicle

� When attaching a two−way radio anten-na

� When rain or water splashes on thesensor.

� When operating the vehicle on an in-clined surface

� When a radio antenna or fender poleis mounted on your vehicle.

� When a towing hitch is mounted onyour vehicle.


337


The system may not detect the follow-ing.

� Thin objects such as a wire or rope

� Objects with a surface area too smallto reflect ultrasonic waves such aswire gauze

� Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-rial such as cotton or snow

� A person near the vehicle (dependingon the type of clothes worn)

� Objects with a sharp edge

� Small or short objects

� Tall objects with an upper part project-ing toward the vehicle

� Objects just under the bumper

� Objects very close to your vehicle

In the following cases, have yourToyota dealer check the system.

� When the bumper is damaged.

� When the indicator is continuously on.

The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image ofthe rear of the vehicle while backingup. The displayed image on the screenis a horizontally reversed mirror imageof the inside rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on thescreen, place the selector lever in the“R” position when the ignition switchin the “ON” position.

If you move the selector lever out of the“R” position, the screen returns to theprevious screen. Operating another func-tion of the navigation system will displayanother screen.

The rear view monitor system is a supple-ment device intended to assist back up.When backing up, be sure to check be-hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

� Never depend on the rear viewmonitor system entirely when back-ing up. Always make sure your in-tended oath is clear.

Use caution just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

� Never back up while looking only atthe screen. The image on thescreen is different from actual con-ditions. Depicted distances betweenobjects and flat surfaces will differfrom actual distances. If you backup while looking only at the screen,you may hit a vehicle, a person oran object. When backing up, besure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mir-rors before proceeding.

� Do not use the system when theback door is not completely closed.

Rear view monitor system


338


� If the back of the vehicle is hit, theposition and mounting angle of thecamera may change. Be sure tohave the camera’s position andmounting angle checked at yourToyota dealer.

� If the temperature changes rapidly,such as when hot water is pouredon the vehicle in cold weather, thesystem may not operate normally.

� If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-here to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

� The displayed image may becomedarker and moving images may beslightly distorted when the systemis cold. When backing up, be sureto check behind and all around thevehicle visually and with mirror be-fore proceeding.

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

Image is displayed approximately levelon screen.

On screen

Corners of bumper


339


� The area detected by the camera islimited. The camera does not detectobjects which are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper.

� The area displayed on the screenmay vary according to vehicle orien-tation or road conditions.

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEMCAMERA

The rear view monitor system camera islocated on the back door as shown in theillustration. The camera uses a speciallens. The distance of the image that ap-pears on the screen differs from the actu-al distance.

In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.

� In the dark (for example, at night)

� When the temperature near the lens ishigh or low

� When water droplets are adhering tothe camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)

� When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-era

� When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens


340


If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked upby the camera, the smear effect∗ peculiarto the camera may occur.∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light sourceappears to have a vertical streak aboveand below it.

Front

Rear

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-signed for power supply for car acces-sories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12VDC/120W (front and rear outletstogether).

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets (12 VDC)


341


Beside second seat

Beside third seat

The power outlets (115 VAC) are de-signed for use as a power supply forelectric appliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

Power outlets (115 VAC)


342


NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box


343


The box is designed to store a garagedoor opener transmitter.

Open the cover and remove the Velcroloop.

Remove the paper strip covering the adhe-sive on back side of loop and adhere loopto back side of the transmitter near cen-ter.

Please note if transmitter has wire clip forsun visor, this clip must be removed priorto adhesion of the Velcro.

Garage door opener box


344


Place the transmitter with Velcro loop fac-ing inside of box into the box. Make surethe transmitter button is located abovebutton pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel.Place one spacer on the pin that would bebelow transmitter button when the cover isclosed. Close the cover.

When the garage door opener transmitteris properly installed, you can operate thetransmitter by pushing the center panel ofthe cover.


345


If the center panel does not contact yourgarage door opener transmitter:

� Check to see if spacer is on the cor-rect pin.

� Attach another spacer to the top oforiginal spacer. Check operation. If re-quired, continue to add spacers untilcontact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driv-ing, fill in a piece of felt or pad to preventthe transmitter from clattering.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the garage dooropener box closed while driving.

� Keep the remaining spacers awayfrom children.

To use the auxiliary box, open the lidas shown in the following illustrations.

Type C—The plate in the center of theauxiliary box can be adjusted or removedas shown in the illustration.

Type I—For details, see “Front seat sidetable” on page 357 in this Section.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Type A and L—As these holders aredesigned for holding a light objectsuch as an eyeglass, do not placeany heavy objects in them. Heavyobjects may cause the holder toopen and contents to fly out result-ing in injuries.

Auxiliary boxes


346


NOTICE

� Type A and L—During hot weather,the interior of the vehicle becomesvery hot. Do not leave anythingflammable or deformable such as alighter, glasses, etc. inside.

� Type L—To prevent damage to theauxiliary box, do not place any ob-ject heavier than 250 g (0.55 lb.) init.

Type A (driver’s side roof)

Type B (instrument panel)

Position 1 Position 2

Type C (instrument panel, without seatheater)


347


Type D (instrument panel, with seat heat-er)

Type E (upper side of the glove box)

Type F (front door)

Type G (quarter trim)

Type H (spare tire cover)

Type I (front seat side table)


348


Type J (rear side of console box)

Type K (front passenger’s seat)

Type L (center roof, with rear seat audiosystem) To use the coin holder, push the but-

ton.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, keep the coin holderclosed when it is not in use.

Coin holder


349


The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans. To use them, ob-serve the following illustrations.

Type C and D—For details, see “Frontseat side table” on page 357 in this Sec-tion.

Type G—For details, see “Removable con-sole box” on page 352 in this Section.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or in an accident.

� Type A and F—To reduce thechance of injury in case of an acci-dent or a sudden stop while driv-ing, keep the cup holder closedwhen it is not in use.

Type A (instrument panel)

Type B (quarter trim)

Type C (front side of the front seat sidetable)

Type D (rear side of the front seat sidetable)

Cup holders


350


Type E (front side of console box)

Type F (rear side of console box)

Type G (console box tray)


351


Front door

Sliding door

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

This box is designed to place thingslike bottles.

Bottle holders Storage box


352


UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-sole box lid.

CONSOLE BOX

To access the console box, pull up thelock release lever and raise the consolebox lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Removable console box


353


Between the front seats

Between the second seats

REMOVING AND INSTALLING THECONSOLE BOX

The console box can be removed andinstalled between the front seats andbetween the second seats as shown inthe illustrations.

When the console box is installed in thesecond seat position, the right side sec-ond seat must be in the outside position.

To remove the console box:Open the auxiliary box of the rear sideand pull up the lock release lever todisengage the rear lock. Then lift theconsole box and release the front hook.


354


To install the console box between thefront seats:

1. Install the front hook in the frontstriker of the console box under−tray.

2. Rotate down straight and push downto engage the rear lock.

CAUTION

� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the console box.

� Make sure the console box is se-curely locked by pushing forward,rearward, upward and sideways.Failure to do so may cause an un-expected accident or severe injuryin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.


355


To install the console box between thesecond seats:

1. Install the front hook in the rearstriker of the double striker set.

The striker is used as both the consolebox lock striker and the right second seatlock striker when the right second seat isin the inside position.

2. Rotate down straight and push downto engage the rear lock.

CAUTION

� Do not install the console box byany means other than the centerstriker between the second seats.Otherwise, the console box cannotbe installed properly.

� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the console box.

� Make sure the console box is se-curely locked by pushing forwardand rearward. Failure to do so maycause an unexpected accident orsevere injury in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

CONSOLE BOX TRAY

When the console box is not installedbetween the front seats, the cup holderand small tray can be installed in theconsole box under−tray between thefront seats.

The cup holder and small tray are in theconsole box.

Before installing the cup holder, pushdown the bottom of the cup and turn itcounterclockwise to lock.


356


To install the cup holder and small tray:

Cup holder—Hook the front of the cupholder to the console box under−tray, thenpush down the back of the cup holder tosecure it.

Small tray—Hook the back of the smalltray to the console box under−tray, thenpush down the front of the small tray tosecure it.

Make sure the cup holder and small trayare locked securely.

CAUTION

� Make sure the the cup holder andsmall tray are securely locked bypushing forward and rearward whenthey are installed. Failure to do somay cause an unexpected accidentor severe injury in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

� Do not place anything other thancups or drink cans in the cup hold-er, and do not place anything in theconsole box tray, as such itemsmay be thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicle duringsudden braking or in an accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the cupholder and small tray stored whenthey are not in use.

Note pad holder


357


The note pad holder is designed tohold small paper such as note pads.

To use the holder, raise the console boxupper lid.

CAUTION

� Do not write on the note pad holderwhile the vehicle is moving.

� Do not place anything else on thenote pad holder. Such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly cause injury duringsudden braking or an accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, keep the consolebox upper lid closed when it is notin use.

The front seat side table can be usedas a cup holder or auxiliary box. It canbe also used as a temporary table onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

The auxiliary box of the table can also beused as a cup holder. To use as a cupholder, open the lid and pull down the tabas shown in the illustration.

Front seat side table


358


To fold down the table, pull up the lockrelease lever and push against the frontpassenger’s seat side.

Make sure the table is locked securely.

CAUTION

� Do not put heavy things on thefront seat side table. The table mayfall down and cause personal injury.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or in an accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop while driving, make sure thetable is folded down and locked se-curely when it is not in use.

To use the coat hook, pull it down.

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and curtainshield airbags—Do not hook a hanger,heavy or sharp pointed object on thecoat hook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be hurledaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly. When you hang clothes, hangthem on the coat hook directly.

Coat hooks


359


These hooks are designed to hangthings like grocery bags.

Type A—To use the hook, pull it down.

Type D—To use the hook, pull it up.

CAUTION

Type A and D—To reduce the chanceof injury in case of an accident or asudden stop while driving, keep thehook stored when it is not in use.

NOTICE

� Type A, B, and C—To prevent dam-age to the hook, do not hang anyobject heavier than 4 kg (8.8 lb.) init.

� Type D—To prevent damage to thehook, avoid hanging heavy loads onit.

Type A (instrument panel)

Type B (front seats)

Type C (third seats)

Type D (under the back door)

Grocery bag hooks


360


Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

These hooks are designed to hang car-go net.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, thesehooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging things other than a cargo neton it.

Cargo net hooks


361


To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.


CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks folded when not in use.

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails (1) attached to the roof andsliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, dothis.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise toloosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desiredposition for loading the luggages ofvarious sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten thecross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

� Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

� If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweights” on page 488 in Section 8for information on your vehicleoverall length and width.)

� Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

Tie−down hooks Roof luggage carrier


362


� If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

� Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof. Rear window

Quarter window

To use the sun shade, pull the tab ofthe shade and hook it on the anchors.To store the shade, pull the tab slightlyto unhook the shade, and lower it slow-ly.

NOTICE

� Do not place anything where itmight hinder the opening/closing ofthe shade.

� Do not place anything on theshade.

Sun shade


363


Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have twoholes, then it is designed for use with twolocking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat


364



365


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak−in period 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converter 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


366


Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (ResearchOctane Number 91) or higher. Forimproved vehicle performance, the useof premium unleaded gasoline with anOctane Rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 96) or higher is recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break−in period Fuel


367


GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.


368


GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveability problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY79 L (21 gal., 17.5 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries


369


The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Three−way catalytic converter


370


CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the back door and quarterwindows closed while driving. Anopen or unsealed back door andquarter windows may cause exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door and quarterwindows closed. Have the cause im-mediately located and corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oilconsumption


371


The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an express way, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 456 in Section 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance smooth drive−abili-ty.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs


372


The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with“ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti−lock brake system is in theself−check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

Brake system


373


When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at the moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.


374


Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

Vehicles without the vehicle stabilitycontrol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if either of the systems malfunc-tions, the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operatebut the brake assist system still operates.In this case the wheels could lock upduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.




CAUTION




375


Vehicles with the vehicle stability con-trol system—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle stability control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.




CAUTION



BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Vehicles with the vehicle stability controlsystem—

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 167 in Sec-tion 1−5.


376


The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

Brake pad wear limitindicators

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber


377


The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

—Engine numberTheft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis


378


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 382.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 381.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “Uniform tire quali-ty grading” that follows.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators—For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 466.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols (run−flat tire or standard tire)


379


6. Run−flat tire (RFT) or standardtire—This vehicle can beequipped with either run−flat tires(RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT”or “DSST” mark is molded on thesidewall of the run−flat tire. Fordetails, see “Run−flat tires” onpage 469.

7. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 466.

10.Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 491.

11.Summer tire or all seasontire—An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 392.


380


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page413.

2. Tire size—For details, see “—Tiresize” on page 382.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)—For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 381.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators—For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 466.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 466.

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)


381


6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 491.

7. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


382


This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


383


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading


384


Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


385


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


386



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two


387



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


388


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below.Total load capacity:

526 kg (1160 Ib.)Total load capacity means com-bined weight of occupants, cargoand luggage. Tongue load is in-cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:7−passenger models—Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)

8−passenger models—Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)

Seating capacity means the maxi-mum number of occupants whoseestimated average weight is 68 kg(150 lb.) per person. Depending onthe weight of each person, the seat-ing capacity given may exceed thetotal load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupantsare within the seating capacity,do not exceed the total load ca-pacity.

Towing capacity:Without towing package

907 kg (2000 Ib.)With towing package

1587 kg (3500 Ib.)Towing capacity means the maxi-mum gross trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo weight) thatyour vehicle is able to tow.

Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits


389


When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)STEPS FOR DETERMININGCORRECT LOAD LIMIT1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution


390


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the available car-go and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 398.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLEIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 526 kg (850 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:526 kg – 166 kg = 360 kg.(1160 lb. – 366 lb. = 794 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

360 kg – 176 kg = 184 kg.(794 lb. – 388 lb. = 406 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 388.


391


CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Cargocapacity

Weight of theremoved second seat

SEATING CONFIGURATIONVARIATIONIn case of removing the second seats,it is possible to load as much cargoas the weight of the removed seats.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) − (Total weight of occupants) +(Weight of the removed second seats)

Second seats weights:7−passenger models—

Right side 28 kg (61 lb.)Left side 25 kg (55 lb.)

8−passenger models—Right side 22 kg (48 lb.)Left side 22 kg (48 lb.)Center 24 kg (52 lb.)


392


Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 378.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels.

Types of tires


393


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All−wheel driving tips 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 403. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


394


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion height, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START”. Release it when the enginestarts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page406 in Section 4.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine—(a) Before cranking (b) Starting the engine


395


NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

Tips for driving in variousconditions


396


� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

� If you need greater traction while driv-ing on sand, mud or snow coveredroadways, use tire chains on the frontwheels.

� Always check your brakes for effective-ness immediately after driving acrosssand, mud, or water.

� If operating in adverse conditionsfrequently, vehicle maintenance shouldbe increased. (See the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Observe the following tire instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� Keep your tire pressure at the prop-er level. (See “Checking tire infla-tion pressure” on page 463 in Sec-tion 7−2.)

� Do not use tires (including snowtires) of different brands, sizes,construction or tread patterns. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 466 and “Installing snow tiresand chains” on page 471 in Section7−2.)

� Do not use tires with different treadwear. To equalize the tire wear, ro-tate tires at the appropriate interval.(See “Rotating tires” on page 468in Section 7−2.)

� Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not use wheelsof different sizes and types. (See“Replacing wheels” on page 473 inSection 7−2.)

NOTICE

Do not attempt to go off−road in yourToyota. It is not designed for off−roaduse.

All−wheel driving tips (AWD models)


397


Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components. Use“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” orequivalent.

See page 458 in Section 7−2 for detailsabout coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze orplain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommendto use 60% solution for your Toyota, toprovide protection down to about −50�C(−58�F). Do not use more than 70% solu-tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 456 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—he will be pleased tohelp.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Winter driving tips


398


Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For your safe-ty and the safety of others, you must notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Ask yourlocal Toyota dealer for further details be-fore towing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed the following.

Without towing package907 kg (2000 lb.)

With towing package1587 kg (3500 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it isnecessary to use a sway control de-vice with sufficient capacity. Thecombination of the gross trailerweight added to the total weight ofthe vehicle, occupants and vehiclecargo must never exceed a total ofthe following.

Two−wheel drive modelsWithout towing package

3266 kg (7200 lb.)With towing package

3946 kg (8700 lb.)

All−wheel drive modelsWithout towing package


3992 kg (8800 lb.)

Dinghy towing Trailer towing


399


Exceeding the maximum weight ofthe trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-hicle and trailer combination, cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight�100 = 9 to 11% (∗1)

or 15% (∗2)

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% for weight carryinghitch (∗1) or 15% for weight distrib-uting hitch (∗2) of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumload of the following.


400


Weight carrying hitchWithout towing package


158 kg (350 lb.)Weight distributing hitch

With towing package238 kg (525 lb.)

Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if soequipped.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.


401


TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 463 in Sec-tion 7−2 and page 491 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For thisinformation, please refer to thescheduled maintenance information inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.


402


� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not place the transmissionin “D”.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 410 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.


403


When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P”, start theengine. Be sure to keep the brake ped-al depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page463 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.Driving with the selector lever in “4”will reduce the fuel economy. (For de-tails, see “Automatic transmission” onpage 179 in Section 1−6.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


404


� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.


405


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 429. . . . . . . . If you cannot operate back door opener 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4


406


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”on page 394 in Section 3 and that youhave sufficient fuel. If your vehicle isequipped with the engine immobilizer sys-tem, also check whether the other keyswill start the engine. If they work, yourkey may be broken. Have the keychecked at your Toyota dealer. If none ofyour keys work, there may be a malfunc-tion in the immobilizer system. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engineimmobilizer system)” on page 10 in Sec-tion 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page407 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three−way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 406 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.Keep the key and accelerator pedal inthese positions for 15 seconds and re-lease them. Then try starting the enginewith your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine


407


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting


408


Discharged battery

Booster battery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)Jumper cable

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

BoosterbatteryNegative terminal

(“−” mark)

Discharged battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.


409


5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 406 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot increase enginespeed


410


If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats


411


1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

Some vehicles are equipped withrun−flat (RFT) tires. The run−flattire allows you to continue drivingfor up to 160 km (100 miles) at aspeed below 90 km/h (55 mph)even if any tire goes flat. However,in some conditions (such as hightemperatures), you could not con-tinue driving for up to 160 km (100miles).When the tire goes flat or when thetire pressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. If you are notsure, consult your Toyota dealer.Do not use the repaired tire.

There is an “RFT” or “DSST” mark onthe sidewall of the run−flat tire.For details about the run−flat tire, see“Run−flat tires” on page 469 in Sec-tion 7−2.Vehicles with compact spare tire—When you replace the tire, see“—Compact spare tire” through “—Af-ter changing wheels”, pages 413through 425 in this Section.

If you have a flat tire——Standard tires information —Run−flat tires information


412


CAUTION

As the run−flat tire allows you tocontinue driving if any tire goesflat, the tire performance is notthe same as normal condition. Ifthe run−flat tire goes flat, takeyour vehicle to the nearest Toyo-ta dealer or authorized tire dealeras soon as possible, observingthe following instructions:� Decelerate as soon as possible

to the lowest appropriatespeed that conditions permit.Do not drive for longer than160 km (100 miles) or over 90km/h (55 mph).

� Avoid abrupt steering wheelmaneuvering and braking. Ifthe vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of thesteering wheel or the brakes,causing death or serious inju-ry.

� Do not replace or repair the tireby yourself. When the tiresmust be replaced or repaired,consult your Toyota dealer orauthorized tire dealer.

NOTICE

� Take due care not to go overa curb stone and be carefulof holes in the road becausedeflated tire pressure affectstire cushion performance.The wheels, tires, body, sus-pension and other compo-nents could be damaged.

� Your ground clearance is re-duced if the run−flat tiregoes flat, so avoid drivingover obstacles and driveslowly on rough, unpavedroads and speed bumps.Also, do not attempt to gothrough an automatic carwash as the vehicle may getcaught, resulting in damage.


413


Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” moldedinto the side wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page463 in Section 7−2 for details on thetread wear indicators and other ser-vice information.

CAUTION

� The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your To-yota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

� Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

� The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).

� Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

� Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

� Avoid sudden acceleration,sudden deceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unpaved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

—Compact spare tire


414


1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Wheel nut wrench2. Jack handle 3. Jack4. Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

To remove the tools, turn the knobcounterclockwise and remove thecover.

To remove the jack, turn the jack jointby hand until the jack becomes free.

—Required tools and sparetire (two−wheel drive models)


415


To store the jack, turn the jack jointuntil the jack base fits securely withthe vehicle body.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To remove the wheel nut wrench, turnthe wingnut counterclockwise.When storing the wheel nut wrench,turn the wingnut clockwise and makesure the wrench is securely held.

To remove the spare tire:1. Slide the front passenger’s seat to

the front−most lock position andthe right side second seat to therear−most lock position so theywill not interfere with the wheel nutwrench.Open the right side sliding doorand you will find the flap on thefloor. Pull back the flap to find thespare tire clamp bolt.


416


2. Loosen the spare tire clamp boltby turning it counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench.

3. After the tire is lowered completelyto the ground, remove the holdingbracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire, takingcare that the tire goes straight upwithout catching on any other part, toprevent it from flying forward duringa collision or sudden braking.As the tire carrier is designed for thecompact spare tire, the standard tirecannot be stored there.

CAUTION

Do not remove the spare tirewhen jacking up the vehicle. Thetire carrier and the spare tire mayinterfere with the jack and causea serious accident.

NOTICE

� To secure spare tire clampbolt: Do not use impact wrench,but wheel nut wrench.

� After taking out or stowingthe spare tire, make sure tosecure the tire carrier bytightening the clamp bolt toprevent the holding bracketfrom hitting the under bodyof the vehicle during driving.

� Do not store the flat sparetire with the tire carrier so itmay not be held securely.


417


1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Wheel nut wrench2. Jack handle3. Jack 4. Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

To remove the tools, turn the knobcounterclockwise and remove thecover.

To remove the jack, turn the jack jointby hand until the jack becomes free.

—Required tools and sparetire (all−wheel drive models)


418


To store the jack, turn the jack jointuntil the jack base fits securely withthe vehicle body.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To remove the wheel nut wrench, turnthe wingnut counterclockwise.When storing the wheel nut wrench,turn the wingnut clockwise and makesure the wrench is securely held.

To remove the spare tire:1. Remove the lid.2. Loosen the nut and remove it.3. Remove the spare tire cover.4. Loosen the bolt, then remove the

bolt and spacer.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.


419


When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

—Blocking the wheel—Removing wheel ornament(steel wheels)


420


4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of personal injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

—Loosening wheel nuts —Jacking up precaution


421


� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

� When jacking up the vehicle,turn off the power sliding doorsystem and the power backdoor system, and close thesliding door and the back doorcompletely.

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

—Positioning the jack


422


6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

—Raising your vehicle —Changing wheels


423


Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts


424


9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench totighten the nuts. Do not use othertools or any additional leverage otherthan your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure thewrench is securely engaged over thenut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.1. Put the wheel ornament into posi-

tion.Align the cutout of the wheel orna-ment with the valve stem as shown.2. Press hand firmly on one side of

wheel ornament and then firmlytap the other side around the edgeof wheel ornament with the heelof your hand to snap into place.

—Lowering your vehicle—Reinstalling wheel ornament(steel wheels)


425


CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

11.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 491 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.12.Restow all the tools and jack se-

curely.

13.Wrap the flat tire in the tire bagand stow temporarily in the lug-gage compartment. The tire bagis stored with the jack handle.

As the tire carrier is designed for thecompact spare tire, the standard tirecannot be stored there.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 491 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.

—After changing wheels


426


Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 188 in Section 1−6.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Vehicles with traction control system(two−wheel drive models)—Turn off thetraction control system to become un-stuck to allow the tires to spin enoughto remove the vehicle from the obstruc-tion. (For details, see “Traction controlsystem (two−wheel drive models)” onpage 182 in Section 1−6.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck


427


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear


All−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—


428


TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatictransmission from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground, as thismay cause serious damage to thetransmission.


All−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


(c) Towing with slingtype truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.


429


You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobilizer system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

Please contact your nearest Toyotadealer and you can purchase a newwireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

If you lose your keysIf you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever


430


3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the back door opener does not oper-ate, you can open the back door fromthe inside.

To open the back door from inside, per-form the following procedure.

1. Remove the cover on the back doortrim.

Without power back door system

With power back door system

If you cannot operate backdoor opener


431


2. Pull the lever with the back door motor,open the back door.

Be sure to have the back door openerchecked/repaired by your Toyota dealer.


432



433


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


434


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 435 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


435


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


436


Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

� With mast type antenna:To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed beforedriving your Toyota through an au-tomatic car wash.

� When your vehicle goes through anautomatic car wash, make sure thepower sliding door and power backdoor system are off.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.


437


3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re−painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbag and curtainshield airbag from activating cor-rectly, resulting in serious injury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Cleaning the interior


438


Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol can sand others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.


439


NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.


440



441


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 446. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


442


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to insure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 447 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements


443


If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 479 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold.See page 458 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 460 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

Battery electrolyte levelYour Toyota has a maintenance free bat-tery. You do not have to add distilled wa-ter. For longer life of the battery, however,see page 476 in Section 7−3 for additionalinformation.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 462 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 456 in Section7−2 for additional information.

General maintenance


444


Power steering fluid levelCheck the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 463 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 370 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all seat controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operatesmoothly and that all latches lock securelyin any position. Check that the head re-straints move up and down smoothly andthat the locks hold securely in any latchedposition. For folding−down rear seatbacksand detachable second seats, check thatthe latches lock securely.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismOn a safe incline, check that your vehicleis held securely with the selector lever in“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all the doors including backdoor operate smoothly and all latches locksecurely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.


445


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 463 in Section 7−2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page466 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 468 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


446


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


447


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1


448


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Electric cooling fans

10. Condenser

11. Radiator

Engine compartment overview


449


Spare fuses

Sparefuses

Fuse locations


450


If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and Sections fordo−it−yourself maintenance, see “Partsand tools” on page 453 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions


451


� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only demineralized or distilledwater to fill the radiator. And if youspill some of the coolant, be sureto wash off with water to prevent itfrom damaging the parts or paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid and power steering fluid,or the transmission and powersteering could be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

Rear (two−wheel drive models)

Positioning the jack


452


Rear (all−wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.


453


Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 456 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


� “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” orequivalent

See page 458 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about coolant type selection.

� Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON®II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent withsame amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 480 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

� Wrench

Parts and tools


454



455


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 462. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run−flat tires 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2


456


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


457


Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark


458


Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add ethyl-ene−glycol type coolant for a propercorrosion protection of aluminum com-ponents.

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

Always use ethylene−glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of alumi-num components. See information in thenext column.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap,radiator cap and drain cock and waterpump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolantlevel


459


CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system. Your coolantmust contain ethylene−glycol type coolantfor proper corrosion protection of your en-gine that contains aluminum components.

We have used “Toyota Genuine Long LifeCoolant” in your Toyota vehicle. In orderto avoid technical problems, we stronglyrecommend using “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant” or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing andsubsequent damage to the engine, thistype of coolant will also prevent corrosion.Further supplemental inhibitors or additivesare neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for informationon freeze protection. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions for how much to mixwith plain water (preferably demineralizedwater or distilled water). The total capacityof the cooling system is given on page489 in Section 8.

We recommend a 50% solution for yourToyota, to provide protection down toabout −35�C (−31�F). When it is extreme-ly cold, to provide protection down toabout −50�C (−58�F), a 60% solution isrecommended. Do not use more than 70%solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE


The engine cooling system is integral tomaximizing performance of your Toyotavehicle. In line with this, it is stronglyrecommended that you use “ToyotaGenuine Long Life Coolant” for protectingthe system, as it is an ethylene−glycolbased premium antifreeze coolant withexcellent corrosion protection propertiesthat has been specifically formulated foruse in Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant”.


460


If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.)

Checking the radiator andcondenser

Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter


461


1. Open the glove box, and slide offthe damper as shown.

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter case from the filteroutlet as shown in the illustration.


462


4. Remove the filter from the filtercase.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

When the brake fluid must be replaced,contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoirbecause brake fluid can harm youreyes and damage painted surfaces. Iffluid gets in your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water immediately. Ifyou still feel uncomfortable with youreyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

Checking brake fluid


463


If cold add

If cold O.K.

If hot add

If hot O.K.

Open

Close

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON�II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

Type A

Checking power steering fluidChecking tire inflationpressure


464


Type B

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 488 and 491. Theyare also on the tire and loading infor-mation label. Either type A or type Bof the tire and loading information la-bel is affixed on your vehicle asshown.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.


465


� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.


466


CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

Checking and replacing tires


467


The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on all−wheel drive mod-els, all the tires must be the samebrand and have the same tread pat-terns.

Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 376, 378 and 380.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.


468


� Do not mix radial, bias belted,or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

� All−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page411 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 188 in Section 1−6.

To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page411 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.

Rotating tires


469


When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 188 in Section 1−6.

Some vehicles are equipped withrun−flat (RFT) tires. The run−flattire allows you to continue drivingfor up to 160 km (100 miles) at aspeed below 90 km/h (55 mph)even if any tire goes flat. However,in some conditions (such as hightemperatures), you could not con-tinue driving for up to 160 km (100miles).When the tire goes flat or when thetire pressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. If you are notsure, consult your Toyota dealer.Do not use the repaired tire.

There is an “RFT” or “DSST” mark onthe sidewall of the run−flat tire.If you cannot distinguish between thestandard tire and run−flat tire, consultyour Toyota dealer.The tire warranty book provides de-tailed information on the run−flat tires.For details, see the tire warrantybook.

CAUTION

� Do not use non−genuinewheels, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use the run−flat tiresequipped on your vehicle onanother model. These tires areespecially for this model.

� Do not mix run−flat tires withstandard tires.

Run−flat tires


470


If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on:Decelerate at a speed below 90km/h (55 mph), then adjust the tirepressure to the specified level assoon as possible. Do not drivemore than 160 km (100 miles).� When the tire pressure is below

140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 20psi), consult your Toyota deal-er. If the tire is flat or the tirepressure is below 100 kPa (1.0kgf/cm2 or bar, 15 psi), the tiremust be replaced. Do not usethe repaired tire.

� When the tire pressure is 140kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 20 psi)or more, adjust it to specifiedlevel. (See “Tires” on page 491in Section 8.)

For details about the tire pressurewarning system, see “Tire pressurewarning system” on page 188 in Sec-tion 1−6.

Vehicles with compact spare tire—When you replace the tire, see“—Compact spare tire” through “—Af-ter changing wheels”, pages 413through 425 in Section 4.

CAUTION

As the run−flat tire allows you tocontinue driving if any tire goesflat, the tire performance is notthe same as normal condition. Ifthe run−flat tire goes flat, takeyour vehicle to the nearest Toyo-ta dealer or authorized tire dealeras soon as possible, observingthe following instructions:� Decelerate as soon as possible

to the lowest appropriatespeed that conditions permit.Do not drive for longer than160 km (100 miles) or over 90km/h (55 mph).

� Avoid abrupt steering wheelmaneuvering and braking. Ifthe vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of thesteering wheel or the brakes,causing death or serious inju-ry.

� Do not replace or repair the tireby yourself. When the tiresmust be replaced or repaired,consult your Toyota dealer orauthorized tire dealer.


471


NOTICE

� Take due care not to go overa curb stone and be carefulof the holes in the road be-cause deflated tire pressureaffects tire cushion perfor-mance. The wheels, tires,body, suspension and othercomponents could be dam-aged.

� Your ground clearance is re-duced if the run−flat tiregoes flat so avoid drivingover obstacles and driveslowly on rough, unpavedroads and speed bumps.Also, do not attempt to gothrough an automatic carwash as the vehicle may getcaught, resulting in damage.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on all−wheel drive models, all thetires must be the same brand and havethe same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� All−wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

Installing snow tires andchains


472


SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place. Mark thedirection of rotation and be sure to installthem in the same direction when replac-ing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

� Vehicles with run−flat tires—Do notreplace or repair the tire by your-self. When the tires must be re-placed or repaired, consult yourToyota dealer or authorized tiredealer.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size andtype.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V−bar typechains.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.


473


WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetires, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� All−wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 188in Section 1−6.

Replacing wheels


474


� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions


475


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 476. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 477. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 478. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 479. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 480. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3


476


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Terminals Ground cable

Hold−downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery condition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior


477


NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window, power slidingdoor, power back door and moon roof maynot operate automatically and the jamprotection function will not function cor-rectly, and does not open the back doorafter you reconnect, replace or rechargethe battery. In any of these cases, youshould normalize each system. To normal-ize them, see “Power windows” on page42, “Power sliding doors” on page 27,“Power back door” on page 36 and “Elec-tric moon roof” on page 53 in Section1−2.

Type A

Green DarkClear orlight yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions


478


Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type C

Good Blown

Type D

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 449 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 492 in Section 8 of this manual forthe functions controlled by each circuit.

Type C and D—When any of the fusesare blown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing fuses


479


Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “HTR” (10A), “AC INV” or “RAD NO.1” fuse, whichmay be dispensable for normal driving,and use it if its amperage rating is thesame.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work or the lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid


480


The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

� When replacing the rear light bulbs,turn off the power back door sys-tem to prevent an unexpected seri-ous injury.

Vehicles with discharge headlights—

� Do not touch the high voltage sock-et when the headlight turns on.20000 V is momentarily generatedand may cause severe injury byelectric shock.

� Do not disassemble, repair or takeapart the headlight bulbs, connec-tor, power supply circuits and ro-tated components. Or you may beinjured by electric shocks. Call yourdealer when the headlights fail towork or have to be replaced or dis-posed of.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs—


481


A: D2R discharge bulbsB: HB4 halogen bulbsC: HB3 halogen bulbsD: H3 halogen bulbsE: Wedge base bulbs (clear)F: Wedge base bulbs (amber)G: Single end bulbsH: Double end bulbs

TypeWBulb No.

3551

Light bulbs

Headlights (low beam)With discharge headlightsWithout discharge headlights

Headlights (high beam)

—9006

AB

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Back−up lights

License plate lights

Luggage compartment light

609005 C

55— D

5— E

213157A F

21— G

21/5— G

18921 E

5— E

5— H

Tail lights 5— E

Front personal lights 4.9— G

Rear personal lights 4.9— G

Vanity lights 3— H

Door courtesy lights 3.8— G


482


1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connec-tor and install it into the mountinghole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights


483


If either the left or right front fog lightbulbs burns out, contact your Toyotadealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front foglight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

—Front fog lights —Front turn signal lights—Parking and front sidemarker lights


484


Remove the bolts.

Pull and hold the tab and remove thebulb unit.

a: Rear turn signal lightb: Stop/tail and rear side marker light

Remove the strap with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

—Rear turn signal, stop/tailand rear side marker lights —Tail and back−up lights


485


a: Tail lightb: Back−up light

NOTICE

When installing the back door trim,be careful not to jam any wire har-ness and connector. Otherwise, theymay be damaged.

Remove the strap with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

—License plate lights


486


NOTICE

When installing the back door trim,be careful not to jam any wire har-ness and connector. Otherwise, theymay be damaged.


487


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 488. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 488. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 489. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 489. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 491. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8


488


Model:3MZ−FE

Type:6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):92.0 � 83.0 (3.62 � 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):3311 (201.9)

Dimensions and weights

Overall width mm (in.)

3030 (119.3)

Overall height mm (in.)

1700 (66.9)∗2

1710 (67.3)∗3

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1665 (65.6)∗2

1675 (65.9)∗3

Rear tread mm (in.)

538 (1185)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With P215/65R16 tires∗3: With P225/60R17 tires

Overall length mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight kg (lb.)(occupants + luggage)

5080 (200.0)

1965 (77.4)

1750 (68.9)∗1

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

Vehicle without towing package

Vehicle with towing package

907 (2000)

1587 (3500)

Engine


489


Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.For improved vehicle performance, theuse of premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher is recom-mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):79 (21, 17.5)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

Drive belt tension measured with Bor-roughs drive belt tension gaugeNo.BT−33−73F (used belt), Ibf:

Generator belt 125�10Power steering pump belt 115�20

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):11.7 (12.4, 10.3)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle. In order toavoid technical problems, we stronglyrecommend using “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant” or equivalent.

Fuel Service specifications


490


With ethylene−glycol type coolant for aproper corrosion protection of aluminumcomponents


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

Two−wheel drive models3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

All−wheel drive models3.6 (3.8, 3.2)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV”(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid inassuring optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFType T−IV” may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.


TRANSFER(all−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

REAR DIFFERENTIAL(all−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

52 (2.0)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

3—5 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3


491


STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

Tires

Tire size Wheel size

P215/65R16 96T 240 (2.4, 35)

240 (2.4, 35) 17 � 6 1/2JJP225/60R17 98T

Compact spare tireTire size kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

T155/80R17 101M 420 (4.2, 60) 17 � 4TWheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

103 (10.5, 76)NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing

wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminumwheel precautions”, pages 463 through 474, in Section 7−2.

Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:

Tire pressure,kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

16 � 6 1/2JJ


492


Engine compartment

Instrument panel (driver’s side)

Fuses (type A)

1. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

2. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, “EFI NO.2” fuse

3. H−LP RL 15 A: Right−hand headlight(low beam)

4. DRL 20 A: Daytime running light sys-tem, “H−LP RH” and “H−LP LH” fuses

5. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

6. H−LP LL 15 A: Left−hand headlight(low beam), front fog lights

Instrument panel (passenger’s side)

7. DOOR NO.2 25 A: Power door locksystem

8. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-cy flashers

9. RAD NO.3 30 A: Audio system

10. A/F 25 A: A/F sensor

11. HORN 10 A: Horns

12. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

Fuses


493


13. DOME 10 A: Interior lights, personallights, vanity lights, door courtesylights, luggage compartment light, igni-tion switch light, multi−information dis-play

14. ECU−B 10 A: Power sliding door, airconditioning system, power windows,multiplex communication system, meterand gauge, wireless remote controlsystem

15. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system, navi-gation system

16. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse




20. SPARE 7.5 A: Spare fuse

21. H−LP RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight

22. H−LP LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight

23. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat audio system,rear seat entertainment system

24. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-ror heaters

25. RAD2 7.5 A: Audio system, navigationsystem, rear seat audio system, rearseat entertainment system

26. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

27. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

28. ECU ACC 7.5 A: Shift lock controlsystem, air conditioning system, powerrear view mirror control

29. GAUGE2 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

30. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, SRS airbag system, multiplexcommunication system

31. INJ 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

32. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper

33. WIP 30 A: Windshield wiper and rearwindow wiper

34. GAUGE1 10 A: Back−up lights, turnsignal lights, emergency flashers

35. S−HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

36. WSH 20 A: Windshield washer andrear window washer

37. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning system

38. ECU−IG 10 A: Toyota park assist sys-tem, rear view monitor system, multi-plex communication system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, anti−lockbrake system, traction control system,vehicle stability control system, shiftlock control system, dynamic lasercruise control system, seat heaters,power back door, electronic moon roof,multi−information display, auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror, powerwindows, power outlets (115V)

39. PANEL 10 A: Air conditioning system,seat heaters, audio system, navigationsystem, power sliding door, power backdoor, multi−information display, rearwindow defogger, emergency flashers,instrument panel lights, steering switchlights

40. TAIL 10 A: Stop/tail lights, licenseplate lights, parking lights, side markerlights

41. S/ROOF 25 A: Electronic moon roof

42. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets (115V)

43. FR DEF 15 A: Windshield wiper de−icer

44. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem


494


45. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, highmounted stoplight, shift lock controlsystem, anti−lock brake system, trac-tion control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, multiplex communicationsystem

46. P/W 25 A: Power windows

47. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

48. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

49. P/VENT 15 A: Power quarter windows

50. ST 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

51. A/C 7.5 A: Manual air conditioning sys-tem

Fuses (type B)

52. MAIN 30 A: Headlights, daytime run-ning light system, “H−LP RL” and “H−LP LL” fuses

53. AM2 30 A: “INJ”, “IGN” and “GAUGE2”fuses

54. P/SEAT 30 A: Power seats

55. PWR 30 A: Power windows

Fuses (type C)


57. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system,“A/C” fuse

58. FAN 50 A: Electric cooling fans

59. PBD 30 A: Power back door

60. R−PSD 30 A: Right side power slidingdoor

61. L−PSD 30 A: Left side power slidingdoor

62. RR A/C 40 A: Rear air conditioningsystem

63. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger,“MIR HTR” fuse

64. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system

65. ABS2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system

66. ST 30 A: Starting system

Fuse (type D)

67. ALT 140 A: Charging system, “RRA/C”, “HTR”, “FAN”, “PBD”, “R−PSD”,“L−PSD” and “DEF” fuses


495


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9


496


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or366−0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

This quick reference guide provides you with information on Dynamic Laser Cruise ControlVehicle- to- Vehicle Distance Control Mode. Prior to use of this system, you should be thoroughly familiarwith this system, referring to “Dynamic Laser Cruise Control” in Section 1- 6, Owner’s Manual inconjunction with this quick reference guide.

� Dynamic Laser Cruise Control OperationThe laser radar sensor in this system primarily detects the reflectors of the vehicle ahead of you to determine the presence of thevehicle and the vehicle- to- vehicle distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.

� If no vehicle is detected ahead of you:

� Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph).

� If a vehicle is detected ahead of you:

� Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance from your vehicleto the vehicle ahead.

� If the vehicle ahead is out of the detection range, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed, and yourvehicle resumes fixedspeed cruising.

� If the vehicle ahead decelerates abruptly or other vehicles cut in ahead of you, your vehicle may be too close to the vehicle aheadof you. If this occurs, the display flashes and beeps. (Approach warning)

The dynamic laser cruise control should be used on roads in which sufficient vehicle- to- vehicle distance will be ensured(such as on freeways).

SIENNA (QRG_U)Introduction & Operation

− 1 −

� Operation Requirements

The selector lever is in the “D” position.

Even if these requirements are met, the system may notoperate properly under certain conditions such as badweather. See “Owner’s Manual” for details.

See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.

y16058q

Cruising from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph)

The wipers are not operating at all or operatingintermittently (including the same wiper operationin the “AUTO” position).

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 2 −

� Cautions� Do not rely too much on dynamic laser cruise control. Vehicle- to- vehicle distance control has its limitations.

Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles. If necessary, depress the brake pedal toensure sufficient distance.

� Dynamic laser cruise control is not a co llision- avoidance system.

If necessary, depress the brake pedal to ensure sufficient distance.

� Dynamic laser cruise control should not be used in the following conditions:

� In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms)

� In direct sunlight from the front

� Raindrops or snowflakes get in the laser radar sensor glass

� On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends

� On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow- covered road surfaces)

� On steep downhill slopes

� Continual acceleration or deceleration (such as on busy traffic)

� On roads with steep and short inclines and declines

In any conditions of the above, an appropriate vehicle- to- vehicle distance control may not be attained.

� This system is not provided to justify careless driving.

Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles.

� The dynamic laser cruise control should not be used when exiting from, or when entering or merging onto a freeway.

When you are following a slower moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect the vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed.

y16078

y16079q


− 3 −

� Cautions� If other vehicles are driving outside of the laser radar detection range, a delay in the detection of the vehicle cutting in

at short range or detection failure of the motorcycle running on the side of the same lane will occur. In this case, thedynamic laser cruise control system will not function properly.

� The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead cannot be accurately detected in the following cases:

� The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance, which means that the placement of the reflectors is in a higher position.

� The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.

� The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you are flinging up water or snow.

� Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming from the vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you, obscuring your frontview.

� Protective film is attached to the reflectors on the vehicle ahead, or reflectors are not installed on the vehicle ahead or aredamaged.

� Heavy luggage is loaded on top of your rear seats.

� The laser radar sensor automatically detects dirt if dirt is sticking to the sensor glass of your vehicle.

However, in some cases dirt may not be detected. At this time warning display does not operate and an appropriatevehicle- to- vehicle distance cannot be maintained. Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead.

� Dynamic laser cruise control does not operate when the vehicle is at a stop or is driving very slowly.

� Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the end of the line in heavy traffic or at the toll gate.

� Turn off the main switch when dynamic laser cruise control is not in use.

� The approach warning may not turn on even if the vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

� Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at almost the same speed.

� The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than yours. (The distance between the vehicles will become longer.)

� The accelerator pedal is depressed, immediately after the release of the accelerator pedal or immediately after the speedsetting.

� Depending on the road configuration (curved roads) or your vehicle condition (steering wheel maneuvering, position inthe lane), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding objects will be detected.


SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 4 −

y16061q

� Warning DisplayIf dynamic laser cruise control detects bad weather or malfunction of the system, the master warning light comes on and the alarmsounds, and one of the warning codes “E1”, “E2” or “E3” will appear on the display.

If a warning message appears on the display, take the appropriate measure referring to Section 1- 6, “Owner’s Manual”.

� Approach WarningDynamic laser cruise control and approach warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead isat a stop or is driving much slower than your vehicle. Use caution for the vehicle at the endof the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate, the vehicle at a stop and the very slow vehicle.

If your vehicle approaches the vehicle ahead because of insufficient braking when the vehicle aheaddecelerates abruptly or when another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, the display flashes and beeps.Depress the brake pedal to slow down, ensuring sufficient vehicle- to- vehicle distance.

Warning code Conditions

E1

E2

E3∗

Laser radar sensor glass is dirty

� Wipers are operating at high or low speeds

� Direct sunlight from front

� It is difficult to make a measurementbecause of bad weather

System malfunction has been detected∗: “CRUISE” indicator light also flashes.

Master WarningLight

“CRUISE”indicator light

Warning code

y16062q


− 5 −

2 Bring your vehicle to the desired speed.

3 Press the control lever downward in the “- SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed.

If a vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain anappropriate distance from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead. If there was no vehicle ahead, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed.

If no vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed.

� Cancelling

To stop the operation: Push the main switch to turn off.

To stop the operation temporarily: Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.

To resume follow- up cruising or cruising at fixed speed,press the control lever upward and release it.

y16065q

y16064qy16063q

� Operation ProcedureThe operation procedure is shown as follows. For the detailed information, see Section 1- 6 in the “Owner’s Manual”.

� Setting

1 Push the main switch (“ON- OFF” button) to turn on the system. The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster come on.

y16066q


SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 6 −

y16067q

� Operation Procedure� Acceleration/Deceleration

To accelerate: Depress the accelerator pedal. (When you release the accelerator pedal, follow- up cruising or fixed speedcruising resumes.) If there was no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will accelerate gradually to the preset speed. At this time,depressing the accelerator pedal or pressing the control lever upward and releasing it will accelerate quickly.

To decelerate: Depress the brake pedal. (Even when you release the brake pedal, dynamic laser cruise control does not returnto follow- up cruising or fixed speed cruising. Press the control lever upward to resume follow- up- cruising or fixed speedcruising.)

� Changing the preset speed

Using the control lever:

1 Press the control lever upward or downward.

� Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction to increase the preset speed.

� Press the control lever downward in the “- SET” direction to decrease the preset speed.

The displayed speed will increase or decrease every 5 mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada and Mexico).

2 Release the control lever when the display shows the desired preset speed.

y16064q

Using the accelerator and brake pedals:

1 Depress the accelerator or brake pedal to attain the desired speed.

2 Press the control lever downward in the “- SET” direction and release the lever.

00/06/06

To increase the preset speed

To decrease the preset speed


− 7 −

y16070q

� Operation Procedure� To restore the previous control

If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you press the lever upward in the “+ RES” direction while “READY” shows up onthe instrument cluster and at a vehicle speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set prior to cancellation will berestored.

� Changing vehicle- to- vehicle distance setting

You can select one of the following vehicle- to- vehicle distances: LONG, MIDDLE or SHORT. Each time you push the distanceswitch briefly, the setting changes from LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT and then back to LONG. You can confirm the setting onthe display.

LONG MIDDLE SHORT


y16069qy16071q y16072q

y16068q

SIENNA (QRG_U)

− 8 −

y16075qy16068q

� Each mode display

The control system in the vehicle- to- vehicle distance controlmode differs from the one in the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode. When using dynamic laser cruise control, make sure whichmode is selected.

00/06/06

In addition to the vehicle- to- vehicle distance control mode described in this quick reference guide, dynamic laser cruisecontrol has conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at fixed speeds. For the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, see Section 1- 6 in the “Owner’s Manual”.

Displays in the instrument cluster:

� Changing to the conventional (fixed speed) control mode

1 Push the main switch (“ON- OFF” button) to turn on thesystem. The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in theinstrument cluster come on.

2 Push the control lever in the “MODE” direction for longerthan 1 second to change to conventional cruise controlmode. The “NORM.” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on.

y16073q

y16068q

y16076q y16077q

y16063qVehicle- to- Vehicle DistanceControl Mode

Fixed Speed Control Mode

In R

eady

Sta

teIn

Con

trol


− 9 −


i


Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

� U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331

� CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free: 1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

© 2004 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.



Publication No. OM45422UPart No. 01999-45422Printed in Japan 01−0408−00

( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 167. . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your engine stalls while driving 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the engine 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher.

See page 366 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 79 L (21 gal., 17.5 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil isrecommended.

See page 457 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 463 through 474.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 491.

gU−3

C


ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


iii


Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.


iv


Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic throttle control system, cruisecontrol system, dynamic laser cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, traction control system, vehicle stabilitycontrol system, SRS airbag system and seat belt preten-sioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealerfor precautionary measures or special instructions regard-ing installation.


v


Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 388 and 463.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.


vi




You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.



Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for SIENNA, written in Eng-

lish, may be purchased as applicable from any

Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2004 SIENNA Repair ManualPub. No.: RM1025U1

RM1025U2



WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

SECTION 1 - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of SECTION 1 - Dealer E Process